Brother Mfc 9 970Cdw Users Manual

2014-12-12

: Brother Brother-Mfc-9-970Cdw-Users-Manual-119185 brother-mfc-9-970cdw-users-manual-119185 brother pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 341

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

PANTONE2728

User’s Guide
Safety and Legal

Basic User’s Guide

Advanced User’s Guide

Safety and Legal

(HL-4150CDN / 4570CDW(T) / MFC-9460CDN / 9560CDW / 9970CDW)

Not all models are available in all countries.
Please read this booklet before attempting to operate the product, or before attempting any
maintenance. Failure to follow these instructions may result in an increased risk of personal injury
or damage to property, including through fire, electrical shock, burns or suffocation.

Symbols and
conventions used in
the documentation
The following symbols and conventions are
used throughout the documentation.
Bold

Italics

Courier
New

Bold typeface identifies specific
keys on the product’s control
panel, on the computer screen.
Italicized typeface emphasizes
an important point or refers you
to a related topic.
Text in Courier New font
identifies messages on the
LCD of the product.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injuries.

CAUTION

Notes tell you how you should
respond to a situation that may arise
or give tips about how the operation
works with other features.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to
possible electrical shock.
Improper Setup icons alert you to
devices and operations that are not
compatible with the product.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to
touch product parts that are hot.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked
on the product.

Note
The illustrations in this guide show the
HL-4150CDN and MFC-9460CDN.
(HL-4150CDN / MFC-9560CDW) In USA:
Please go to the Brother Solutions Center at
http://solutions.brother.com/ and click
Manuals on your model page to download
the other manuals.

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injuries.

IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in damage to property or loss of
product functionality.
Version B
USA/CAN

Compilation and Publication

Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without
notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors
relating to the publication.

Choosing a location
Put your product on a flat, level, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk.
Put the product near a telephone wall jack and a standard grounded AC power outlet. Choose a
location where the temperature remains between 50°F and 90.5°F (10°C and 32.5°C) and the
humidity is between 20% to 80% (without condensation).

WARNING
DO NOT expose the product to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, salty or corrosive
gasses, moisture or dust. Doing so may create a risk of an electrical short or fire. It may also
damage the product and/or render it inoperable.
DO NOT place the product near heaters, air conditioners, electrical fan, refrigerators, or water.
Doing so may create the risk of a short circuit or fire, should water come into contact with the
product (including condensation caused by heating/air conditioning/ventilation equipment).
DO NOT place the product near chemicals. Should the chemicals come into contact with the
product, there may be a risk of fire. The chemicals may also cause the product to malfunction
or become discolored.
DO NOT put the product in a location where any slot or opening in the product is obstructed or
blocked. These slots and openings are provided for ventilation. Blocking the product’s
ventilation could create a risk of overheating and/or fire.

Instead:
• Keep a gap of roughly 4 in. (100 mm) between the ventilation hole and the wall.
• Place the product on a solid surface, never on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar soft surface.
• DO NOT place this product near or over a radiator or heater.
• DO NOT place this product in a “built-in” installation unless adequate ventilation is provided.
DO NOT put objects on top of the product. Doing so could increase the risk of overheating
and/or fire should the product malfunction.
DO install your product near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In the event of an
emergency, easy access to the plug and outlet will allow you to shut off power to the product
quickly and completely.
Plastic bags are used in the packing of your product and drum unit. Plastic bags are not toys.
To avoid the danger of suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children and dispose
of them properly.

CAUTION
Avoid placing your product in a high-traffic area. If you must place it in a high-traffic area, ensure
that the product is in a safe location where it cannot be accidentally knocked-over, which could
cause injury to you and serious damage to the product. Also ensure that cords are secured so
as not to pose a tripping hazard. DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
The product is heavy and may fall, causing injury to you, and serious damage to the product.
DO NOT eat the Silica Pack. Discard immediately.

IMPORTANT
• DO NOT place your product next to devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields.
Doing so may interfere with the operation of the product, causing print quality problems.
• DO NOT place your product next to sources of interference, such as speakers or the base units
of non Brother cordless telephones. Doing so may interfere with the operation of the product's
electronic components.
• DO NOT connect your product to an AC power outlet controlled by wall switches or automatic
timers. Disruption of power can delete information from the product's memory.
• DO NOT connect your product to an AC power outlet on the same circuit as large appliances
or other equipment that requires a significant amount of electricity to operate. Operating this
product in conjunction with the other product(s) could create an overvoltage, tripping your
circuit breaker or blowing your fuse.

To use the product safely
Please keep these instructions for later reference and read them before attempting any
maintenance. If you do not follow these safety instructions, there is a possibility of a fire, electrical
shock, burn or suffocation.

WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
Failure to follow the warnings in this section may create the risk of an electrical shock. In
addition, you could create an electrical short, which may create the risk of a fire.

There are high voltage electrodes inside the product. Before you access the inside of the
product, including for routine maintenance such as cleaning, make sure you have unplugged the
telephone line cord first (MFC only) and then the power cord from the AC power outlet, as well
as any telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45) cables (Network models only) from the product.
Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short out parts.

DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands.

Always make sure the plug is fully inserted. DO NOT use the product or handle the cord if the
cord has become worn or frayed.
DO NOT use this product during an electrical storm.
DO NOT allow this product to come into contact with water. This product should not be used
around standing water including a bathtub, sink, or swimming pool, around appliances
containing water including a refrigerator, or in a wet basement.

This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the
rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind
of power source you have, contact a qualified electrician.
Power Cord Safety:
• This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug. This plug will only fit into a grounded
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, call
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. DO NOT defeat the purpose of the grounded
plug.
• Use only the power cord supplied with this product.
• DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord. DO NOT place this product where people
can walk on the cord. DO NOT place this product in a position where the cord is stretched or
strain is otherwise put on the cord. Doing so may cause the cord to become worn or fray.
• If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere ratings on the
products plugged into the extension cord. DO NOT exceed the extension cord ampere rating.
Also, make sure that the total of all products plugged into the AC power outlet does not
exceed 15 amperes.
• The power cord, including extensions, should be no longer than 16.5 feet (5 meters).

(MFC only)
To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
(MFC only)
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or
terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack.
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a
wet location.

FIRE HAZARDS
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid containing
alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could cause a fire.
Instead, use only a dry, lint-free cloth. See Routine Maintenance in the User's Guide/Basic
User's Guide for more information on how to clean the product.

DO NOT attempt to operate this product with a paper jam or with stray pieces of paper inside
the product. Prolonged contact of the paper with the drum unit could cause a fire.
DO NOT use a vacuum cleaner to clean up scattered toner. Doing this might cause the toner
dust to ignite inside the vacuum cleaner, potentially starting a fire. Please carefully clean the
toner dust with a dry, lint-free soft cloth and dispose of it according to local regulations.
DO NOT use this product in the vicinity of a gas leak or combustible dust.

HOT SURFACE
After you have just used the product, some internal parts of the product will be extremely hot.
Wait for the product to cool down before you touch the internal parts of the product.

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high
speed and can pinch or entrap your hand.

Languages on the label may vary depending on your country.
7

• This product is heavy and weighs more than 46.3 lb (21.0 kg) for Printer, and more than
58.4 lb (26.5 kg) for MFC. To prevent injuries when moving or lifting this product, make sure
to use at least two people. Be careful not to pinch your fingers when you set the product back
down.
• If you use a Lower Tray, carry it separately from your product.

(MFC only)
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people, including the following:
1 DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink
or washing product, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2 Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric
shock from lightning.
3 DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
4 Use only the power cord provided with the product.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION
(MFC-9460CDN / MFC-9560CDW only)
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your hands on the edge of the product under the
scanner as shown in the illustrations.

(MFC only)
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your fingers in the areas shown in the illustrations.

IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove or damage any of the caution or warning labels inside the product.

Lightning and power surges can damage this product! We recommend that you use a quality
surge protection device on the AC power line and any telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45) cable
(Network models only) plugged into the product, or that you unplug the cords during a lightning
storm.

Important safety instructions

1 Read all of these instructions.
2 Save them for later reference.
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
4 Be careful not to inhale toner.
5 DO NOT place anything in front of the product that will block received faxes or printed pages.
DO NOT place anything in the path of received faxes or printed pages.
6 Wait until pages have exited the product before picking them up.
7 DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself because opening or removing covers may
expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and may void your warranty. Refer all
servicing to a Brother Authorized Service Center. For the location of your nearest Brother
Authorized Service Center, please call:
In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER
8 Unplug this product from the AC power outlet and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized
Service Personnel under the following conditions:
 When the power cord is damaged or frayed. (DO NOT touch the damaged/frayed part while
unplugging your product.)
 If liquid has been spilled into the product.
 If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
 If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by
a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
 If the product has been dropped or the casing has been damaged.
 If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
9 For Material Safety Date Sheet for applicable accessories, visit http://www.brother.com/. (USA
only)

Regulation
Standard telephone and FCC notices (MFC only)
These notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only.
When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:
 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging
up.
 Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to the telephone company.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack,
USOC RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. (See installation instructions for
details.)
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs,
contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this
product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits
represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier
products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will
provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted
service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers in the Basic User's Guide.) If the equipment is
causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect
the equipment until the problem is resolved.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about
what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.
If you are not able to solve a problem with your product, call Brother Customer Service. (See
Brother numbers in the Basic User's Guide.)

WARNING
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall
outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of
Conformity (USA only)
Responsible Party:

Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
TEL: (908) 704-1700

declares, that the products
Product Name:
HL-4150CDN/HL-4570CDW/HL-4570CDWT/MFC-9460CDN/MFC-9560CDW/MFC-9970CDW
Model Numbers: HL-41/HL-45/MFC-9460CDN/MFC-9560CDW/MFC-9970CDW
Product Options: LT-300CL
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
 Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

 (Wireless network models only)
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.

IMPORTANT
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B
digital device.
• (MFC only)
This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or
connected to party lines.
• (MFC only)
Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your use
of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no
warranties extended or granted by this document.
• (MFC only)
This product has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the USA
only. A grounded plug should be plugged into a grounded AC power outlet after checking the
rating of the local power supply for the product to operate properly and safely.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB–003 du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of this device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif.

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS (Canada only)
(MFC only)
NOTICE
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
Le présent materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.

NOTICE
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices
does not exceed five.
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui
peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme
d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.

Laser safety (For 110-120V Models Only)

This equipment is certified as a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC60825-1:2007
specifications under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation
Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This
means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the equipment is completely confined within protective housings
and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the product during any phase of user
operation.

FDA regulations (For 110-120V Models Only)

U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations for laser products
manufactured on and after August 2, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the
United States. One of the following labels on the back of the product indicates compliance with
the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
Manufactured:
BROTHER TECHNOLOGY (SHENZHEN) LTD.
NO6 Gold Garden Ind., Nanling Buji, Longgang, Shenzhen, China
This product complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant
to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.

WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous invisible radiation exposure.
Internal laser radiation
Max. Radiation Power: 20 mW
Wave Length: 770 - 800 nm
Laser Class: Class 3B

For use in the USA or Canada only

These products are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using
them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations (for MFC models
only) of that country and the power requirements of your product may not be compatible with the
power available in foreign countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk
and may void your warranty.

Disconnect device

This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of
emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off power
completely.

LAN connection (Network models only)

CAUTION
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.

International ENERGY STAR® Qualification Statement
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and
popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets
the ENERGY STAR® specifications for energy efficiency.

Trademarks

The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Outlook and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Apple, Macintosh, Safari and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United
States and other countries.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Intel, Intel Core and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of IBM in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, Photoshop, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Corel and CorelDRAW are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation and/or its
subsidiaries in Canada, the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Alliance are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related
documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those
respective companies.

Open Source Licensing Remarks

This product includes open-source software.
Please see Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright information on the supplied CD-ROM.
(For Windows®) “X:\License.txt” (where X is your drive letter).
(For Macintosh) Double-click the CD-ROM icon on your desktop. Then double-click the Utilities
icon. License.rtf will appear.

©2010 Brother Industries, Ltd.
This product includes software developed by the following vendors:
©1983-1998 PACIFIC SOFTWORKS, INC.
©2010 Devicescape Software, Inc.
This product includes the “KASAGO TCP/IP” software developed by ZUKEN ELMIC, Inc.

Other Information (MFC only)
FlashFX® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX® Copyright 1998-2010 Datalight, Inc.
U.S.Patent Office 5,860,082/6,260,156
FlashFX® Pro™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Datalight® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Copyright 1989-2010 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved

Legal limitations for copying (MFC only)

Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in either criminal or civil
liability. The listing below is intended to be a guide rather than a complete listing of every possible
prohibition. In case of doubt, we suggest that you consult with the appropriate authority or advisor
with regard to the specific document.
The following documents issued by the United States/Canadian Government or any of its
Agencies, States, Territories or Provineces may not be copied:
 Money
 Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
 Certificates of Deposit
 Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
 Selective Service or draft papers
 Passports
 United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
 Food Stamps
 Immigration Papers
 Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies
 Identifying badges or insignias
 Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles, under certain State/Provincial law
Coping copyrighted works may be regulated by Federal, State of local laws. For more information,
consult an appropriate authority or advisor.

BASIC USER’S GUIDE
MFC-9970CDW

Version A
USA/CAN

If you need to call Customer Service
Please complete the following information for future
reference:
Model Number: MFC-9970CDW
Serial Number: 1
Date of Purchase:
Place of Purchase:
1

The serial number is on the back of the unit. Retain
this User’s Guide with your sales receipt as a
permanent record of your purchase, in the event of
theft, fire or warranty service.

http://www.brother.com/registration/
By registering your product with Brother, you will be recorded as the
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:
 may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product
should you lose your receipt;
 may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss
covered by insurance; and,
 will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special
offers.
The most convenient and efficient way to register your new product is
online at http://www.brother.com/registration/.

Brother numbers
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be
made from within that country.

Register your product
By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be recorded as the
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:
 may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;
 may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,
 will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.
Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration and Test Sheet or, for your
convenience and most efficient way to register your new product, register on-line at

http://www.brother.com/registration/

FAQs (frequently asked questions)
The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax Machine/Multi-Function
Center needs. You can download the latest software and utilities and read FAQs and
troubleshooting tips to learn how to get the most from your Brother product.

http://solutions.brother.com/
Note
You can check here for Brother driver updates.
To keep your machine’s performance up to date, check here for the latest firmware upgrade.

For Customer Service
In USA:

1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
1-901-379-1215 (fax)

In Canada:

1-877-BROTHER
(514) 685-4898 (fax)

Service Center Locator (USA only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
or visit us on-line at http://www.brother-usa.com/service/.

Service Center Locations (Canada only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.
i

Ordering accessories and supplies
For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are available at most Brother
retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover,
or American Express credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (You can visit
us online for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and supplies that are available for
purchase.)

Note
In Canada, only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.

In USA:

1-877-552-MALL (1-877-552-6255)
1-800-947-1445 (fax)

http://www.brothermall.com/
In Canada:

1-877-BROTHER

http://www.brother.ca/
Description
Toner Cartridge

Toner Cartridge

Item
TN-310BK (Approx. 2,500 pages) 1 2 3
TN-315BK (Approx. 6,000 pages) 1 2 4
TN-310C (Approx. 1,500 pages) 1 2 3
TN-315C (Approx. 3,500 pages) 1 2 4
TN-310M (Approx. 1,500 pages) 1 2 3
TN-315M (Approx. 3,500 pages) 1 2 4
TN-310Y (Approx. 1,500 pages) 1 2 3
TN-315Y (Approx. 3,500 pages) 1 2 4

Drum Unit

DR-310CL (Approx. 25,000 pages) 5 6

Waste Toner Box

WT-300CL (Approx. 50,000 pages) 1

Description

Item

Belt Unit

BU-300CL (Approx. 50,000 pages) 1

Telephone Line Cord

LG3077001

Paper Tray #2 (Option)

LT-300CL

Basic User's Guide

LX4383001 (English for USA and Canada)
LX4383002 (French for Canada)

Quick Setup Guide

LX4864001 (English for USA and Canada)
LX4385002 (French for Canada)

Letter or A4 size single-sided pages.

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Standard toner cartridge

High capacity toner cartridge

1 page per job.

Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

iii

Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties
(USA and Canada)
BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR
AGENTS (COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE
SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE
ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE
SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS
OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT
PERMITTED BY SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE
ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER’S LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT
LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.

Compilation and Publication Notice
Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without
notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors
relating to the publication.

Brother® Color Laser One-Year On-Site Limited Warranty
(USA only)
Who is covered:
 This limited warranty (“warranty”) is given
only to the original end-user/retail
purchaser (referred to in this warranty as
“Original Purchaser”) of the accompanying
product, consumables and accessories
(collectively referred to in this warranty as
“this Product”).
 If you purchased a product from someone
other than an authorized Brother reseller in
the United States or if the product was used
(including but not limited to floor models or
refurbished product by someone other than
Brother), prior to your purchase you are not
the Original Purchaser and the product that
you purchased is not covered by this
warranty.
What is covered:
 This Product includes a Machine and
Consumable and Accessory Items.
Consumable and Accessory Items include
but are not limited to Toner Cartridges,
Drum Units, Belt Unit, and Waste Toner
Box.
 Except as otherwise provided herein,
Brother warrants that the Machine and the
accompanying
Consumable
and
Accessory Items will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship, when used
under normal conditions.
 This warranty applies only to products
purchased and used in the United States.
For products purchased in, but used
outside, the United States, this warranty
covers only warranty service within the
United States (and does not include
shipping outside the United States).
What is the length of the Warranty Periods:
 Machines: one year from the original
purchase date.
 Accompanying
Consumable
and
Accessory Items: 90 days from the original
purchase date or the rated life of
consumable, whichever comes first.

What is NOT covered:
This warranty does not cover:
1 Physical damage to this Product;
2 Damage caused by improper installation,
improper or abnormal use, misuse, neglect
or accident (including but not limited to
transporting this Product without the proper
preparation and/or packaging);
3 Damage caused by another device or
software used with this Product (including
but not limited to damage resulting from
use of non Brother®-brand parts and
Consumable and Accessory Items);
4 Consumable and Accessory Items that
expired in accordance with a rated life;
5 Problems arising from other than defects in
materials or workmanship; and,
6 Normal Periodic Maintenance Items, such
as Paper Feeding Kit, Fuser and Laser
Units.
This limited warranty is VOID if this Product
has been altered or modified in any way
(including but not limited to attempted warranty
repair without authorization from Brother
and/or alteration/removal of the serial
number).
What to do if you think your Product is
eligible for warranty service:
Report your issue to our Customer Service
Hotline at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
or to a Brother Authorized Service Center
within the applicable warranty period.
Supply Brother or the Brother Authorized
Service Center with a copy of your dated bill of
sale showing that this Product was purchased
within the U.S. For the name of local Brother
Authorized Service Center(s), call 1-877BROTHER
(1-877-276-8437)
or
visit
www.brother-usa.com.
What Brother will ask you to do:
After contacting Brother or a Brother
Authorized Service Center, you may be
required to provide information pertaining to
the defect or malfunction of this Product.

Brother® Color Laser One-Year On-Site Limited Warranty
(USA only)
What Brother will do:
If the problem reported concerning your
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable
and Accessory Items is covered by this
warranty and if you first reported the problem
to Brother or an Authorized Service Center
within the applicable warranty period, Brother
or its Authorized Service Center will evaluate
your report of a possible defect to determine
whether a defect exists, and if it does exist,
Brother or an Authorized Service Center will
provide “On-site Warranty Service” during
“Normal Working Hours” and will repair the
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable
and Accessory Items at no charge to you for
parts or labor. “On-site Warranty Service” shall
consist of the remedial service, as
necessitated by normal usage, to restore this
product to good operating condition at your
location and does not guarantee uninterrupted
operation of this Product. “Normal Working
Hours” shall mean 9:00am to 5:00pm (local
time), Monday through Friday, excluding legal
and local holidays observed by Brother or the
Authorized Service Center.
If the Machine and/or accompanying
Consumable and Accessory Items are not
covered by this warranty, you will be charged
for any
service and/or replacement
parts/products at Brother’s or the Authorized
Service Center’s then current published rates.
The foregoing are your sole (i.e., only) and
exclusive remedies under this warranty.
What you must provide:
Reasonable cooperation with the Brother
Representative in troubleshooting as they
diagnose the problem, provide access to this
Product at reasonable times and provide
adequate working space including heat, light,
ventilation, electric current and outlets for the
use of the Brother representative.

Limitations:
Brother is not responsible for damage to or
loss of any equipment, media, programs or
data related to the use of this Product.
Except for the repair as described above,
Brother shall not be liable for any direct,
indirect, incidental or consequential damages
or specific relief. Because some states do not
allow the exclusion or limitation of
consequential or incidental damages, the
above limitation may not apply to you.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, WRITTEN OR
ORAL,
WHETHER
EXPRESSED
BY
AFFIRMATION, PROMISE, DESCRIPTION,
DRAWING, MODEL OR SAMPLE. ANY AND
ALL WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THIS
ONE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY
DISCLAIMED.
 This Limited Warranty is the only warranty
that Brother is giving for this Product. It is
the final expression and the exclusive and
only statement of Brother’s obligations to
you. It replaces all other agreements and
understandings that you may have with
Brother or its representatives.
 This warranty gives you certain rights and
you may also have other rights that may
vary from state to state.
 This Limited Warranty (and Brother’s
obligation to you) may not be changed in
any way unless you and Brother sign the
same piece of paper in which we (1) refer
to this Product and your bill of sale date, (2)
describe the change to this warranty and
(3) agree to make that change.

BROTHER LASER PRINTER / MULTIFUNCTION CENTER® / FAX
ON-SITE LIMITED WARRANTY
(Canada Only)
For a limited on-site warranty of 1 year labour and parts from the date of purchase, Brother
International Corporation (Canada) Ltd. (“Brother”), or its authorized on-site service
providers, will repair or replace (at Brother’s sole discretion) this Laser Printer/MFC/Fax
machine free of charge if defective in material or workmanship.
This warranty applies only to products purchased and used in Canada. This limited Warranty
does not include cleaning, consumables (including, without limitation, toner cartridges and
drum units, OPC belts, fixing units, print heads, paper feed rollers, transfer rolls, cleaning
rollers, waste toner packs, oil bottles) or damage caused by accident, neglect, misuse or
improper installation or operation or any damage caused from service, maintenance,
modifications, or tampering by anyone other than a Brother Authorized Service
Representative, or if shipped out of the country. Damage caused by the use of non-Brother
toner is not covered under this warranty. This limited warranty ceases when this machine is
rented, sold, or otherwise disposed of. Operation of the laser printer/MFC/Fax in excess of
the specifications or with the Serial Number or Rating Label removed shall be deemed abuse
and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability of the end-user/purchaser. The Laser
Printer/MFC/Fax machine will be serviced on-site. Canadian Proof of Purchase in the form of
a Sales Receipt must be provided if requested by the service personnel. In the event that
geographical location does not permit us to provide on-site service to you, Brother reserves
the right to exchange your machine with an equivalent or better one through a courier service.
When shipping or transporting your Laser Printer/MFC/Fax machine, please refer to your
Operation Manual for the proper packaging procedures. Failure to remove the Toner
Cartridge (and Toner Drum Unit, waste toner packs or oil bottles on applicable models) during
shipping or transport will cause severe damage to the Laser Printer/MFC/Fax machine and
will void the Warranty. Improper packaging may cause severe damage to the machine during
shipping and will void the warranty.
BROTHER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
INCLUDING,
WITHOUT
LIMITATIONS,
ANY
IMPLIED
WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
THAT ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW CANNOT BE VALIDLY WAIVED.
No oral or written information, advice or representation provided by Brother, its Authorized
Service Centres, Distributors, Dealers, Agents or employees, shall create another warranty
or modify this warranty. The warranty states Brother’s entire liability and your exclusive
remedy against Brother for any failure of the Laser Printer/MFC/Fax machine to operate
properly. Neither Brother nor anyone else involved in the development, production, or
delivery of this Laser Printer/MFC/Fax machine shall be liable for any indirect, incidental,
special, consequential, exemplary, or punitive damages, including lost profits, arising from
the use of or inability to use the product, even if advised by the end user/purchaser of the
possibility of such damages. Since some Provinces do not allow the above limitation of
liability, such limitation, may not apply to you.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other
rights which vary from Province to Province.
Warranty Service is available at Brother Authorized
Service Centres throughout Canada. For Technical
Assistance or for the name and location of your nearest
Authorized Service Centre call 1-877-Brother.
Internet support: support@brother.ca or browse Brother’s Web Site www.brother.ca.

vii

User's Guides and where do I find it?
Which manual?

What's in it?

Where is it?

Safety and Legal

Read this Guide first. Please read the
Safety Instructions before you set up your
machine. See this Guide for trademarks
and legal limitations.

Printed / In the Box

Quick Setup Guide

Follow the instructions for setting up your
machine and installing the drivers and
software for the operating system and
connection type you are using.

Printed / In the Box

Basic User's Guide

Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and Direct
Print operations and how to replace
consumables. See troubleshooting tips.

Printed / In the Box

Advanced User's Guide

Learn more advanced operations: Fax,
Copy, security features, printing reports
and performing routine maintenance.

PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the Box

Software User's Guide

Follow these instructions for Printing,
Scanning, Network Scanning, Remote
Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother
ControlCenter utility.

PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the Box

Network Glossary

This Guide provides basic information
about advanced network features of
Brother machines along with explanations
about general networking and common
terms.

PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the Box

Network User's Guide

This Guide provides useful information
about wired and wireless network settings
and security settings using the Brother
machine. You can also find supported
protocol information for your machine and
detailed troubleshooting tips.

PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the Box

viii

Table of Contents
(BASIC USER’S GUIDE)
1

General information

Using the documentation ....................................................................................... 1
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation .................................... 1
Accessing the Advanced User’s Guide, Software User’s Guide and
Network User’s Guide......................................................................................... 2
Viewing Documentation ................................................................................... 2
Accessing Brother Support (Windows®)................................................................ 4
Accessing Brother Support (Macintosh) ................................................................ 5
Control panel overview .......................................................................................... 6
LCD Touchscreen............................................................................................ 8
Basic Operations ............................................................................................. 9

Loading paper

Loading paper and print media ............................................................................ 10
Loading paper in the standard paper tray......................................................10
Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray (MP tray) ........................................ 12
Unscannable and unprintable areas.............................................................. 17
Paper settings...................................................................................................... 18
Paper Size and Type ..................................................................................... 18
Tray Use in copy mode..................................................................................19
Tray Use in fax mode ....................................................................................19
Tray Use in print mode ..................................................................................20
Acceptable paper and other print media.............................................................. 21
Recommended paper and print media ..........................................................21
Type and size of paper ..................................................................................21
Handling and using special paper ................................................................. 23

Loading documents

How to load documents .......................................................................................26
Using the automatic document feeder (ADF) ................................................ 26
Using the scanner glass ................................................................................27

Sending a fax

How to send a fax ................................................................................................28
Faxing A4/Legal/Folio size documents from the scanner glass .................... 29
Color fax transmission ................................................................................... 30
Canceling a fax in progress ...........................................................................30
Transmission verification report..................................................................... 30

Receiving a fax

Receive modes ....................................................................................................32
Choose the correct Receive Mode ................................................................32
Using receive modes ...........................................................................................34
Fax Only ........................................................................................................34
Fax/Tel...........................................................................................................34
Manual ...........................................................................................................34
External TAD .................................................................................................34
Receive Mode settings ........................................................................................35
Ring Delay .....................................................................................................35
F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only) ...............................................................35
Easy Receive.................................................................................................36

Telephone services and external devices

Telephone line services .......................................................................................37
Voice Mail ......................................................................................................37
Distinctive Ring ..............................................................................................38
Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)................................40
Connections...................................................................................................41
Recording an outgoing message (OGM) .......................................................41
Multi-line connections (PBX) .........................................................................41
External and extension telephones......................................................................42
Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................42
Using external and extension telephones .....................................................42
Using a non-Brother cordless external handset ............................................42
Using Remote Codes ....................................................................................43

Dialing and storing numbers

How to dial ...........................................................................................................44
Manual dialing ...............................................................................................44
One touch dialing...........................................................................................44
Speed dialing .................................................................................................44
Search ...........................................................................................................45
LDAP search .................................................................................................45
Fax redial .......................................................................................................45
Storing numbers ..................................................................................................46
Storing a pause .............................................................................................46
One Touch and Speed Dial Storage Options ................................................47
Storing One Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................48
Storing Speed Dial numbers..........................................................................50
Changing or Deleting One Touch and Speed Dial numbers .........................51

Making copies

How to copy .........................................................................................................53
Stop copying ..................................................................................................53
Copy settings .................................................................................................53

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera
supporting mass storage
54
Creating a PRN or PostScript® 3™ file for direct printing.................................... 54
Printing data directly from the USB Flash memory drive or digital camera
supporting mass storage ..................................................................................55
Changing the default settings for direct print .................................................56

How to print from a computer

Printing a document............................................................................................. 57

How to scan to a computer

Scanning a document .......................................................................................... 58
Scanning using the scan key ............................................................................... 58
Scanning using a scanner driver .........................................................................59

Routine maintenance

Replacing the consumable items.........................................................................60
Replacing a Toner cartridge .......................................................................... 64
Cleaning the corona wires .............................................................................70
Replacing the drum unit................................................................................. 75
Replacing the belt unit ................................................................................... 82
Replacing the waste toner box ......................................................................88

Troubleshooting

Error and maintenance messages....................................................................... 95
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report .............................................103
Document jams.................................................................................................. 104
Document is jammed in the top of the ADF unit ..........................................104
Document is jammed under the document cover ........................................104
Removing small documents jammed in the ADF......................................... 105
Document is jammed at the output tray ....................................................... 105
Paper jams......................................................................................................... 106
Paper is jammed in the MP tray ..................................................................106
Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray 2 ................................................... 107
Paper is jammed at the back of the machine .............................................. 108
Paper is jammed inside the machine...........................................................110
Paper is jammed underneath paper tray 1 .................................................. 114
If you are having difficulty with your machine ....................................................117
Setting Dial Tone detection .........................................................................126
Telephone line interference / VoIP .............................................................. 126
Improving the print quality..................................................................................127
Machine Information ..........................................................................................134
Checking the Serial Number........................................................................ 134
Reset functions ............................................................................................134
How to reset the machine ............................................................................ 135

Menu and features

136

On-screen programming ....................................................................................136
Menu table ...................................................................................................136
MENU button and mode keys ............................................................................136
Menu table .........................................................................................................137
Entering text.......................................................................................................172

Specifications

173

General ..............................................................................................................173
Document Size ..................................................................................................175
Print media.........................................................................................................176
Fax.....................................................................................................................178
Copy ..................................................................................................................179
Scanner .............................................................................................................180
Printer ................................................................................................................181
Interfaces ...........................................................................................................182
Direct Print feature .............................................................................................183
Scan to USB feature ..........................................................................................184
Computer requirements ....................................................................................185
Consumable items .............................................................................................187
Network (LAN) ...................................................................................................188

xii

Index

189

Table of Contents
(ADVANCED USER’S GUIDE)
The Advanced User's Guide explains the following features and operations.
You can view the Advanced User's Guide on the Documentation CD-ROM in the box.

General Setup

Memory storage
Volume settings
Automatic daylight savings time

Routine maintenance
Cleaning and checking the machine

LCD screen

Replacing periodic maintenance parts

Dial Prefix

Packing and shipping the machine

Options

Security features

Options

Secure Function Lock 2.0

Optional paper tray (LT-300CL)

Setting Lock

Memory board

Restricting dialing

Copy settings

Ecology features

Mode Timer

Making copies

Sending a fax
Additional sending options

Glossary

Index

Additional sending operations
Polling overview

Receiving a fax
Remote Fax Options (black & white only)
Additional receiving operations
Polling overview

Dialing and storing numbers
Telephone line services
Additional dialing operations
Additional ways to store numbers

Printing reports
Fax reports
Reports

xiii

xiv

General information

Using the
documentation

The following symbols and conventions are
used throughout the documentation.
Bold

Bold style identifies keys on the
machine control panel or
computer screen.

Italics

Italicized style emphasizes an
important point or refers you to
a related topic.

Courier
New

Courier New font identifies the
messages shown on the LCD
of the machine.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injuries.

Thank you for buying a Brother machine!
Reading the documentation will help you
make the most of your machine.

Symbols and conventions
used in the documentation

CAUTION
1

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injuries.

IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in damage to property or loss of
product functionality.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a
possible electrical shock.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to
touch machine parts that are hot.
Notes tell you how you should
respond to a situation that may arise
or give tips about how the current
operation works with other features.

Chapter 1

Accessing the
Advanced User’s
Guide, Software User’s
Guide and Network
User’s Guide

Turn on your computer. Insert the
Documentation CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive. For Windows® users, go
to step c.

Note
(Windows® users) If the screen does not
appear automatically, go to My Computer
(Computer), double-click the CD-ROM
icon, and then double-click index.html.

(Macintosh users) Double-click the
Documentation CD-ROM icon, and then
double-click index.html.

Click your country.

Point to your language, point to
View Guide, and then click the guide
you want to read.

This Basic User's Guide does not contain all
the information about the machine such as
how to use the advanced features for Fax,
Copy, Printer, Scanner, PC-Fax and
Network. When you are ready to learn
detailed information about these operations,
read the Advanced User's Guide, Software
User’s Guide, Network User’s Guide, and
Network Glossary that are on the
Documentation CD-ROM.

Viewing Documentation

General information

Presto! PageManager User’s Guide

Note

(Macintosh)

• (Windows® users only) Your Web browser
may display a yellow bar at the top of the
page that contains a security warning
about Active X controls. For the page to
display correctly you must click on the bar,
click Allow Blocked Content, then click
Yes in the Security Warning dialog box.

Presto! PageManager is available as a
download from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/
PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg

• (Windows® users only) 1 For faster
access, you can copy all user
documentation in PDF format to a local
folder on your computer. Point to your
language, then click Copy to local disk.
1

 The complete Presto! PageManager
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help
selection in the Presto! PageManager
application.
How to find Network setup instructions

Microsoft® Internet Explorer ® 6.0 or greater.

How to find Scanning instructions
There are several ways you can scan
documents. You can find the instructions as
follows:
Software User's Guide
 Scanning

Note

Your machine can be connected to a wireless
or wired network. You can find basic setup
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your
wireless access point or router supports Wi-Fi
Protected Setup or AOSS™, you can also
follow the steps in the Quick Setup Guide. For
more information about network setup please
see the Network User's Guide on the
Documentation CD-ROM.

 ControlCenter
 Network Scanning
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™12SE with OCR
How-to-Guides
(Windows®)
 The complete ScanSoft™
PaperPort™12SE with OCR How-toGuides can be viewed from the Help
selection in the ScanSoft™
PaperPort™12SE application.

Chapter 1

Accessing Brother
Support (Windows®)

You can find all the contacts you will need,
such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center), Customer Service and Brother
Authorized Service Centers on page i and on
the Installation CD-ROM.
 Click Brother Support on the main menu.
The following screen will appear:

 To access our Web site
(http://www.brother.com/) click Brother
Home Page.
 To view all Brother Numbers, including
Customer Service numbers for the USA
and Canada, click Support Information.
 To access the USA Brother online
shopping mall
(http://www.brothermall.com/) for
additional product and service
information, click Brother Mall.com.
 To access Canada’s Brother online
shopping mall (http://www.brother.ca/) for
additional product and services
information, click Shop Online (Canada).
 For the latest news and product support
information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
 To visit our web site for genuine Brother
supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click
Supplies Information.

 To access the Brother CreativeCenter
(http://www.brother.com/creativecenter/)
for FREE photo projects and printable
downloads, click Brother
CreativeCenter.
To return to the main page, click Back.
Or, if you have finished, click Exit.

General information

Accessing Brother
Support (Macintosh)

You can find all the contacts you will need,
such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center), Customer Service and Brother
Authorized Service Centers in Brother
numbers on page i and on the Installation
CD-ROM.
 Double-click the Brother Support icon.
The following screen will appear:

 To download and install Presto!
PageManager, click
Presto! PageManager.
 To register your machine from the Brother
Product Register Page
(http://www.brother.com/registration/),
click On-Line Registration.
 To view all Brother Numbers, including
Customer Service numbers for the USA
and Canada, click Support Information.
 For the latest news and product support
information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
 To visit our Web site for genuine Brother
Supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click
Supplies Information.

Chapter 1

Control panel overview

01.01.2011 15:15

Address
Book

One Touch keys
These 20 keys give you instant access to 40
previously stored numbers.
21-40 b
The 21-40 b lets you access One Touch
numbers 21 to 40 when held down.

LCD
This is a Touchscreen LCD. You can access
the menus and options by pressing buttons
displayed on the screen.

SCAN
Puts the machine in Scan mode.
COPY
Puts the machine in Copy mode.

Secure
Print

Fax

Direct
Print

Dial pad
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax
numbers and as a keyboard for entering
information into the machine.
This function transfers to the touchscreen
when you store quick dial numbers.
(Canada only) The # key temporarily switches
the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone during a
telephone call.

Stop/Exit
Stops an operation or exits from a menu.

Start:
Color
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies
in full color.
Black
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies
in black & white.

Mode keys:
FAX
Puts the machine in Fax mode.

General information

01.01.2011 15:15

Address
Book

Secure
Print

Fax

Direct
Print

FAX keys:
Hook
Press before dialing if you want to make sure a
fax machine will answer, and then press
Black Start or Color Start. Also, press this
key after you pick up the handset of an external
telephone during the F/T ring (fast
double-rings).
Redial/Pause
Redials the last number called. It also inserts a
pause when programming quick dial numbers
or when dialing a number manually.
Print Data / Job Cancel
Cancels a programmed print job and clears it
from the machine’s memory. To cancel
multiple print jobs, hold down this key until the
LCD shows Cancel Printing (All).
Also, this key will flash depending on the
machine’s status.

Machine Status

Description

Ready Mode

The machine is ready to
print, in sleep mode, there
is no print data, or the
power switch is off.

Receiving Data

The machine is either
receiving data from the
computer, processing data
in memory, or printing data.

Green (blinking)
Data Remaining
in Memory

Print data remains in the
machine memory.

Green

Chapter 1

LCD Touchscreen

Direct Print
Lets you print data from a USB flash memory
drive or a digital camera supporting mass
storage directly to the machine. (See Printing
data directly from the USB Flash memory drive
or digital camera supporting mass storage
on page 55.)
Active only when you insert a USB flash
memory drive or digital camera in the
machine's USB direct interface.

Security indicator
Shows machine's security status. Appears
when you turn on Secure Function Lock or
Setting Lock.

The LCD Touchscreen shows the current
machine status when the machine is idle.
1
01.01.2011

Address
Book

2
15:15

3 4 5

7
Fax

Secure
Print

Direct
Print

Setting Lock

Date and Time
Lets you see date and time.

MENU
Lets you access the main menu.

Fax duplex (2–sided) receiving indicator
Appears when duplex printing is set to on for
received faxes.

Secure Print
Lets you access the secure print menu.
Active only when the machine has secure print
data.

Fax in memory
Shows how many received faxes are in the
memory.

Wireless Status
In FAX mode and SCAN mode a four level
indicator shows the current wireless signal
strength if you are using a wireless connection.

0
7

Max

Current Receive Mode
Lets you see the current receive mode.
 Fax (Fax only)
 F/T (Fax/Tel)
 TAD (External TAD)
 Mnl (Manual)

10 Warning icon
Appears when there is an error or maintenance
message; press the Warning icon to view it,
and then press Stop/Exit to return to the
Ready screen.
11 Address Book
Lets you search the number you want to
fax/dial/E-mail/I-Fax.

General information

Basic Operations

To operate the Touchscreen use your finger
to press the MENU or option button directly on
the LCD screen.
To display and access all the screen menus
or options in a setting, press a b or d c to
scroll through them.
Press

to return to the previous menu.

Press Backlight.

MENU > General Setup
LCD Settings

Backlight

Light

Dim Timer

Off

Press Dark.
MEMU > General Setup > LCD Settings

Backlight

Light

IMPORTANT

Med

Dark

DO NOT press the Touchscreen with a
sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It
may damage the machine.

Press Stop/Exit.

The following steps show how to change a
setting in the machine. In this example the
LCD back light setting is changed from
Light to Dark.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

General Setup
Fax
Printer
Print Reports

Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
Press LCD Settings.

MENU
General Setup

Mode Timer
Tray Setting
Volume
Ecology

Loading paper

Loading paper and
print media

When you put paper into the paper tray, note
the following:
 If your application software supports
paper size selection on the print menu,
you can select it through the software. If
your application software does not
support it, you can set the paper size in
the printer driver or by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.

You can load up to 250 sheets for Tray 1 and
500 sheets for the optional lower tray (Tray
2). Paper can be loaded up to the maximum
paper mark (b b b) on the sliding paper width
guide. (For recommended paper to use, see
Paper capacity of the paper trays
on page 22.)

Printing on plain paper, thin paper or
recycled paper from the standard
paper tray (Tray 1)

The machine can feed paper from the
standard paper tray, optional lower tray or
multi-purpose tray.

Loading paper in the standard
paper tray

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.

Loading paper

WARNING

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in
the illustration. These rollers may be
rotating at high speed and can pinch or
entrap your hand.

While pressing the green paper-guide
release lever (1), slide the paper guides
to fit the paper size you are loading in
the tray. Make sure that the guides are
firmly in the slots.

Fan the stack of paper well to avoid
paper jams and misfeeds.

Chapter 2

Put paper in the tray and make sure:
 The paper is below the maximum
paper mark (b b b) (1).
Overfilling the paper tray will cause
paper jams.
 The side to be printed on must be
face down.
 The paper guides touch the sides of
the paper so it will feed properly.
1

Loading paper in the
multi-purpose tray (MP tray)
You can load up to 3 envelopes or special
print media in the MP tray or up to 50 sheets
of plain paper. Use this tray to print or copy on
thick paper (28 - 43 lb.), bond paper, glossy
paper, labels, or envelopes. (For
recommended paper to use, see Paper
capacity of the paper trays on page 22.)

Printing on plain paper, bond paper,
labels or glossy paper from the MP
tray

Put the paper tray firmly back in the
machine. Make sure that it is completely
inserted into the machine.

Lift up the support flap (1) to prevent
paper from sliding off the face down
output tray or remove each page as
soon as it comes out of the machine.

Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

Loading paper

Pull out the MP tray support and unfold
the flap (1).

Put paper in the MP tray and make sure:
 The paper stays under the maximum
paper mark (1).
 The top of paper edge is positioned
between the arrows (2).
 The side to be printed on must be
face up with the leading edge (top of
the paper) in first.
1

Note
When you are using glossy paper, put only
one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid
a paper jam.

Chapter 2

Lift up the support flap to prevent paper
from sliding off the face down output
tray, or remove each page as soon as it
comes out of the machine.

Printing on envelopes and thick paper
from the MP tray
Before loading, press the corners and sides
of the envelopes to make them as flat as
possible.

Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

Loading paper

Pull out the MP tray support and unfold
the flap (1).

Lift up the support flap to prevent
envelopes or sheets of thick paper from
sliding off the face down output tray. If
the support flap is closed you should
remove each envelope as soon as it
comes out of the machine.

Open the back cover (Face up output
tray).

Put up to 3 envelopes or up to 25 sheets
of thick paper [43 lb (163 g/m2)] in the
MP tray. If you add more envelopes or
paper it may cause a jam. Make sure:
 The top edge of the envelope is
positioned between the arrows (1).
 The side to be printed on must be
face up.

Chapter 2

Pull down the two gray levers, one on
the left-hand side and one on the righthand side, to the envelope position as
shown in the illustration below.

g
h
i

Close the back cover.
Send the print data to the machine.
When you have finished printing, open
the back cover and reset the two gray
levers which were pulled down in
step f back to their original positions.

Note
• Remove each printed envelope
immediately to prevent a paper jam.
• If your thick paper curls during printing, put
only one sheet at a time in the MP tray and
open the back cover (face up output tray)
to let the printed pages exit to the face up
output tray.

Loading paper

Unscannable and unprintable areas

The figures below show maximum unscannable and unprintable areas. The unscannable and
unprintable areas may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the application you are
using.

2
2

Usage

Document
Size

Top (1)

Left (2)

Bottom (1)

Right (2)

Letter

0.12 in. (3 mm)

0.16 in. (4 mm)

0.12 in. (3 mm)

Copy*

Letter

0.16 in. (4 mm)

*a single copy
or a 1 in 1 copy

0.16 in. (4 mm)

Scan

Letter

0.12 in. (3 mm)

Letter

0.16 in. (4 mm)

Fax (Sending)

Chapter 2

Paper settings
Paper Size and Type

e
2

When you change the size of paper in the
tray, you will also need to change the setting
for paper size at the same time so your
machine can fit the document or an incoming
fax on the page.
You can use the following sizes of paper for
printing copies: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive,
A5, A5 L, A6, B5, B6 and Folio and the
following sizes for printing faxes: A4, Letter,
Legal or Folio (8.5 in. × 13 in.).
Following on the paper size setting, you can
set up the machine for the type of paper you
are using. This will give you the best print
quality.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Tray Setting.
Press Tray Setting.

Do one of the following:
 To set the paper type for the
MP Tray press a or b to display
MP Tray.
Press MP Tray
 To set the paper type for Tray#1
press a or b to display Tray#1.
Press Tray#1
 To set the paper type for Tray#2
press a or b to display Tray#2.
Press Tray#2 1 if you installed the
optional tray.
1

The Tray#2 button will be selectable if the
optional tray is installed.

Press d or c to display the paper size
options.
Press A4, Letter, Legal,
Executive, A5, A5 L, A6, B5, B6,
Folio or Any.

Note
• Any size appears only when you choose
the MP tray.
• If you choose Any for the MP Tray Paper
Size: You must choose MP Only for the
Tray Use setting. You cannot use the Any
Paper Size selection for the MP tray when
making N in 1 copies. You must choose
one of the other available Paper Size
selections for the MP tray.
• A5 L and A6 size are not available for
Tray#2.

Press Thin, Plain, Thick, Thicker,
Recycled Paper or Glossy.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
You can choose Glossy for the
MP Tray.

Loading paper

Tray Use in copy mode

Tray Use in fax mode

You can change the priority tray that the
machine will use for printing copies.

You can change the default tray that the
machine will use for printing received faxes.

When you choose Tray#1 Only, MP Only
or Tray#2 Only 1, the machine pulls the
paper only from that tray. If the selected tray
is out of paper, No Paper will appear on the
LCD. Insert the paper in the empty tray.

To change the tray setting follow the
instructions below:

When you choose T1>T2 1>MP, the machine
pulls paper from Tray #1 until it is empty, then
from Tray #2, and then from the MP tray.
When you choose MP>T1>T2 1, the machine
pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty,
then from Tray #1, and then from Tray #2.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Tray Setting.
Press Tray Setting.

Press a or b to display
Tray Use:Copy.
Press Tray Use:Copy.

Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only 1,
MP Only, MP>T1>T2 1 or T1>T2 1>MP.
1

The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the
optional tray is installed.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
• When loading the documents in the ADF
and MP>T1>T2 or T1>T2>MP is selected,
the machine looks for the tray with the
most suitable paper and pulls paper from
that tray. If no tray has suitable paper, the
machine pulls paper from the higher
priority tray.
• When using the scanner glass, your
document is copied from the higher
priority tray even if more suitable paper is
in another paper tray.

Note
• You can use four sizes of paper for
printing faxes: A4, Letter, Legal or Folio.
When a suitable size is not in any of the
trays received faxes will be stored in the
machine’s memory and Size mismatch
will appear on the LCD. (For details, see
Error and maintenance messages
on page 95.)
• If the tray is out of paper and received
faxes are in the machine’s memory,
No Paper will appear on the LCD. Insert
paper in the empty tray.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Tray Setting.
Press Tray Setting.

Press a or b to display Tray Use:Fax.
Press Tray Use:Fax.

Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only 1,
MP Only, MP>T1>T2 1 or T1>T2 1>MP.

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the
optional tray is installed.

Press Stop/Exit.
19

Chapter 2

Tray Use in print mode

You can change the default tray the machine
will use for printing from your computer.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Tray Setting.
Press Tray Setting.

Press a or b to display
Tray Use:Print.
Press Tray Use:Print.

Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only 1,
MP Only, MP>T1>T2 1 or T1>T2 1>MP.
1

The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the
optional tray is installed.

Press Stop/Exit.

Loading paper

Acceptable paper and
other print media

Recommended paper and
print media

Print quality may vary according to the type of
paper you are using.
You can use the following types of print
media: thin paper, plain paper, thick paper,
bond paper, recycled paper, glossy paper,
labels or envelopes.
For best results, follow the instructions below:
 DO NOT put different types of paper in the
paper tray at the same time because it
may cause paper jams or misfeeds.
 For proper printing, you must choose the
same paper size from your software
application as the paper in the tray.
 Avoid touching the printed surface of the
paper immediately after printing.
 Before you buy a lot of paper, test a small
quantity to make sure the paper is
suitable.

Paper Type

Item

Plain Paper

Xerox 4200DP 20 lb

Hammermill Laser Print
(24 lb=90 g/m2)
Recycled Paper

No specific brand
recommended

Labels

Avery laser labels white
#5160

Envelope

No specific brand
recommended

Glossy Paper

Glossy Laser Paper

Type and size of paper

The machine feeds paper from the installed
standard paper tray, multi-purpose tray or
optional lower tray.

The name for the paper trays in the
printer driver in this Guide are as
follows:
Tray and optional unit

Name

Standard paper tray

Tray 1

Multi-purpose tray

MP Tray

Optional lower tray

Tray 2

Chapter 2

Paper capacity of the paper trays

Paper Tray
(Tray 1)

Paper size

Paper types

No. of sheets

A4, Letter, Legal, B5,
Executive, A5,
A5 (Long Edge), A6, B6,

Plain paper, Thin paper
and Recycled paper

up to 250
[20 lb (80 g/m2)]

50 sheets
[20 lb (80 g/m2)]

Length: 4.57 to 16 in.
(116 to 406.4 mm)

Plain paper, Thin paper,
Thick paper,
Thicker paper,
Bond paper,
Recycled paper,
Envelopes, Labels and
Glossy paper

A4, Letter, Legal, B5,
Executive, A5, B6,

Plain paper, Thin paper
and Recycled paper

Folio 1
Multi-purpose Tray
(MP Tray)

Optional lower Tray
(Tray 2)

Width: 2.75 to 8.5 in.
(69.8 to 216 mm)

Folio 1
1

3 Envelopes
1 Glossy paper

up to 500
[20 lb (80 g/m2)]

Folio size is 8.5 in. × 13 in. (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm)

Recommended paper specifications
The following paper specifications are suitable for this machine.
Basis weight

20-24 lb (75-90 g/m2)

Thickness

80-110 μm

Roughness

Higher than 20 sec.

Stiffness

90-150 cm3/100

Grain direction

Long grain

Volume resistivity

10e9-10e11 ohm

Surface resistivity

10e9-10e12 ohm-cm

Filler

CaCO 3 (Neutral)

Ash content

Below 23 wt%

Brightness

Higher than 80%

Opacity

Higher than 85%

 Use paper made for plain paper copying.
 Use paper that is 20 to 24 lb (75 to 90 g/m2).
 Use long grain paper with a neutral Ph value, and a moisture content of approx. 5%.
 This machine can use recycled paper that meets DIN 19309 specifications.

Loading paper

Handling and using special
paper
The machine is designed to work well with
most types of xerographic and bond paper.
However, some paper variables may have an
effect on print quality or handling reliability.
Always test samples of paper before
purchasing to ensure desirable performance.
Store paper in its original packaging and keep
it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from
moisture, direct sunlight and heat.

Types of paper to avoid

IMPORTANT

Some types of paper may not perform well
or may cause damage to your machine.

DO NOT use paper:
• that is highly textured
• that is extremely smooth or shiny
• that is curled or warped

Some important guidelines when selecting
paper are:
 DO NOT use inkjet paper because it may
cause a paper jam or damage your
machine.

 Preprinted paper must use ink that can
withstand the temperature of the
machine’s fusing process 392 degrees
Fahrenheit (200 degrees centigrade).

• that is coated or has a chemical finish

 If you use bond paper, paper having a
rough surface or paper that is wrinkled or
creased, the paper may exhibit degraded
performance.
 When you are using glossy paper, put only
one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid
a paper jam.

A curl of 0.08 in. (2 mm) or greater
may cause jams to occur.

• that is damaged, creased or folded
• that exceeds the recommended weight
specification in this guide
• with tabs and staples
• with letterheads using low temperature
dyes or thermography
• that is multipart or carbonless
• that is designed for inkjet printing
If you use any of the types of paper listed
above, they may damage your machine.
This damage is not covered under any
Brother warranty or service agreement.

Chapter 2

Envelopes

Most envelopes designed for laser printers
will be suitable for your machine. However,
some envelopes may have feed and printquality problems because of the way they
have been made. A suitable envelope should
have edges with straight, well-creased folds
and the leading edge should not be thicker
than two sheets of paper. The envelope
should lie flat and not be of baggy or flimsy
construction. You should buy quality
envelopes from a supplier who understands
that you will be using the envelopes in a laser
machine.

• with windows, holes, cut-outs or
perforations
• with glue on surface as shown in figure
below

• with double flaps as shown in figure
below

We recommend that you print a test envelope
to make sure the print results are what you
want.

Types of envelopes to avoid

IMPORTANT
DO NOT use envelopes:
• that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or
an unusual shape

• with sealing flaps that are not folded
down when purchased
• with sealing flaps as shown in figure
below

• that are extremely shiny or textured
• with clasps, staples, snaps or tie
strings
• with self-adhesive closures
• that are of a baggy construction

• with each side folded as shown in
figure below

• that are not sharply creased
• that are embossed (have raised writing
on them)
• that were previously printed by a laser
machine
• that are pre-printed on the inside
• that cannot be arranged neatly when
stacked
• that are made of paper that weighs
more than the paper weight
specifications for the machine
• with edges that are not straight or
consistently square

If you use any of the types of envelopes
listed above, they may damage your
machine. This damage may not be
covered under any Brother warranty or
service agreement.

Loading paper

Labels

The machine will print on most types of labels
designed for use with a laser machine. Labels
should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based
since this material is more stable at the high
temperatures in the fuser unit. Adhesives
should not come in contact with any part of
the machine, because the label stock may
stick to the drum unit or rollers and cause
jams and print quality problems. No adhesive
should be exposed between the labels.
Labels should be arranged so that they cover
the entire length and width of the sheet. Using
labels with spaces may result in labels
peeling off and causing serious jams or print
problems.

All labels used in this machine must be able
to withstand a temperature of 392 degrees
Fahrenheit (200 degrees centigrade) for a
period of 0.1 seconds.

Types of labels to avoid

Do not use labels that are damaged, curled,
wrinkled or an unusual shape.

IMPORTANT
• Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet
exposed because your machine will be
damaged.
• Label sheets should not exceed the paper
weight specifications described in this
User’s Guide. Labels exceeding this
specification may not feed or print properly
and may cause damage to your machine.
• DO NOT reuse or insert labels that have
previously been used or are missing a few
labels on the sheet.

Loading documents

How to load
documents

Note
3

You can send a fax, make copies, and scan
from the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
and the scanner glass.

Using the automatic
document feeder (ADF)

• To scan documents that are not suitable
for the ADF, see Using the scanner glass
on page 27.
• It is easier to use the ADF if you are
loading a multiple page document.
• Make sure documents with correction fluid
or written with ink are completely dry.

The ADF can hold up to 50 pages and feeds
each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb
(80 g/m2) paper and always fan the pages
before putting them in the ADF.

Unfold the ADF document support (1).
Lift up and unfold the ADF document
output support flap (2).
1
2

Document Sizes Supported
Length:

5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356.0 mm)

Width:

5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm)

Weight:

17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m2)

How to load documents

IMPORTANT

b
c

Fan the pages well.

Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the
width of your document.

• DO NOT leave thick documents on the
scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may
jam.
• DO NOT use paper that is curled,
wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paperclipped, pasted or taped.

Place your document face up top edge
first in the ADF until the LCD display
message changes and you feel it touch
the feed rollers.

• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or
fabric.
• To avoid damaging your machine while
using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the
document while it is feeding.

Loading documents

Note
• To avoid damaging your machine while
using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the
document while it is feeding.

Using the document guidelines on the
left and top, place the document face
down in the upper left corner of the
scanner glass.

• To scan non-standard documents, see
Using the scanner glass on page 27.

Using the scanner glass

You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or
scan pages of a book one page at a time.

Document Sizes Supported
Length:

Up to 14.0 in. (355.6 mm)

Width:

Up to 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Weight:

Up to 4.4 lb (2.0 kg)

How to load documents

Note
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must
be empty.

Lift the document cover.

Close the document cover.

IMPORTANT
If the document is a book or is thick, do not
slam or press on the cover.

Sending a fax

How to send a fax

c
4

The following steps show how to send a fax.

Set the scanner glass size, fax
resolution or contrast if you want to
change them.

Note

When you want to send a fax, or change
fax send or receive settings, press the
(FAX) key to illuminate it in blue.

For more advanced fax sending
operations and settings, see Sending a
fax in Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's
Guide:
• Broadcasting
• Duplex Fax (2-sided fax layout)
• Delayed Fax
• Batch TX

 The LCD shows:

• Real Time TX
• Polled TX

FAX
Duplex Fax

Fax
Resolution

Off

Standard

Address Book

• Overseas Mode
• Fax Resolution
• Contrast

Do one of the following to load your
document:
 Place the document face up in the
ADF. (See Using the automatic
document feeder (ADF) on page 26.)
 Load your document face down on
the scanner glass. (See Using the
scanner glass on page 27.)

Note
To send color faxes with multiple pages
use the ADF.

• Glass ScanSize
• Coverpage Setup
• Coverpage Message
• Set New Default
• Factory Reset

Choose one of the options below:
 If you want to send a single-sided
document, go to step e.
 If you want to send a 2-sided
document, you need to choose the
duplex scanning format of your
2-sided document.
Press Duplex Fax and choose
DuplexScan :LongEdge or
DuplexScan :ShortEdge.

Note
You can send 2-sided documents from the
ADF.

Sending a fax

Enter the fax number using the dial pad.
You can also enter the fax number on
the LCD by pressing Address Book
and Send a fax, or you can press an
One Touch key on the machine’s control
panel. (For details, see How to dial
on page 44.)
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Faxing from the ADF
 The machine starts scanning the
document.

Faxing A4/Legal/Folio size
documents from the scanner
glass
When faxing A4/Legal/Folio size documents,
you will need to set the scan glass size to A4
or Legal/Folio; otherwise, a portion of
your faxes will be missing.

a
b

Press

c
d

Press A4 or Legal/Folio.

Faxing from the scanner glass
If Real Time TX is On, the machine
will send the document without asking if
there are additional pages to scan.
 If you press Black Start, the
machine starts scanning the first
page.
Do one of the following:
• To send a single page, press No
(or press Black Start again). The
machine starts sending the
document.

(FAX).

Press d or c to display
Glass ScanSize.
Press Glass ScanSize.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
You can save the setting you use most
often by setting it as the default. (See
Setting your changes as the new default in
Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's Guide.)

• To send more than one page,
press Yes and place the next
page on the scanner glass. Press
Black Start. The machine starts
scanning the page. (Repeat this
step for each additional page.)
 If you press Color Start and
Yes (Color fax), the machine
starts sending the document.

Note
To cancel, press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 4

Color fax transmission

Your machine can send a color fax to
machines that support this feature. Color
faxes cannot be stored in the machine's
memory. When you send a color fax, the
machine will send it in real time (even if Real
Time TX is set to Off).

Canceling a fax in progress
Press Stop/Exit to cancel the fax. If you
press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing
or sending, the LCD will show
Cancel Job?.
Press Yes to cancel the fax.

Transmission verification
report
You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. This
report lists the receiving party’s name or fax
number, the time and date of transmission,
duration of transmission, number of pages
sent, and whether or not the transmission
was successful.
There are several settings available for the
Transmission Verification Report:
 On: Prints a report after every fax you
send.
 On+Image: Prints a report after every fax
you send. A portion of the fax’s first page
appears on the report.
 Off: Prints a report if your fax is
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
Off is the default setting.
 Off+Image: Prints a report if your fax is
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on
the report.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Report Setting.
Press Report Setting.

d
e

Press Transmission.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press On, On+Image, Off or
Off+Image.

Sending a fax

Note
• If you choose On+Image or Off+Image,
the image will only appear on the
Transmission Verification Report if Real
Time Transmission is set to Off. (See
Real Time Transmission in Chapter 3 of
the Advanced User's Guide.)
• If your transmission is successful, OK will
appear next to RESULT on the
Transmission Verification Report.
If transmission is not successful, NG will
appear next to RESULT.

Receiving a fax

Receive modes
Choose the correct Receive Mode
The correct Receive Mode is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber
services (Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring, etc.) you have (or will be using) on the same line as the
Brother machine.
Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?
Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring" but different telephone companies may have other names for this
service such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,
Data Ident-A-Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. (See Distinctive Ring
on page 38 for instructions on setting up your machine using this feature.)
Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility
that Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls. (See
Voice Mail on page 37 for instructions on setting up your machine using this service.)
Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother
machine?
Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will automatically answer every call. Voice messages are
stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Choose External TAD as your receive mode.
(See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device) on page 40.)
Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?
Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Choose Fax Only as your receive mode. (See
Fax Only on page 34.)
Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?
Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?
The Fax/Tel receive mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the
same line. Choose Fax/Tel as your receive mode. (See Fax/Tel on page 34.)
Important Note: You can not receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering
machine when choosing the Fax/Tel mode.
Do you expect to receive very few faxes?
Choose Manual as your receive mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call
yourself. (See Manual on page 34.)

Receiving a fax

To set the receive mode follow the instructions below:

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Receive Mode.
Press Receive Mode.

d
e

Press Fax Only, Fax/Tel, External TAD or Manual.

Press a or b to display Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.

Press Stop/Exit.

The LCD will display the current receive mode.

Chapter 5

Using receive modes

Fax Only mode will automatically answer
every call as a fax.

Fax/Tel
Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically
manage incoming calls, by recognizing
whether they are fax or voice calls and
handling them in one of the following ways:
 Faxes will be automatically received.
 Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you
to pick up the line. The F/T ring is a fast
double ring made by your machine.
(Also see F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)
on page 35 and Ring Delay on page 35.)

To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the
handset of the external telephone or press
Hook. When you hear fax tones (short
repeating beeps), press Black Start or
Color Start, and choose Receive to receive
the fax. You can also use the Easy Receive
feature to receive faxes by lifting a handset on
the same line as the machine.
(Also see Easy Receive on page 36.)

External TAD
External TAD mode lets an external
answering device manage your incoming
calls. Incoming calls will be handled in the
following ways:
 Faxes will be automatically received.
 Voice callers can record a message on the
external TAD.
(For more information see Connecting an
external TAD (telephone answering device)
on page 40.)

Manual mode turns off all automatic
answering functions unless you are using the
Distinctive Ring Receive feature.

Some receive modes answer automatically
(Fax Only and Fax/Tel). You may want to
change the Ring Delay before using these
modes. (See Ring Delay on page 35.)

Fax Only

Manual

Receiving a fax

Receive Mode settings
Ring Delay
The Ring Delay setting sets the number of
times the machine rings before it answers in
Fax Only and Fax/Tel modes.
If you have external or extension telephones
on the same line as the machine, keep the
Ring Delay setting of 4. (See Easy Receive
on page 36.)

F/T Ring Time
(Fax/Tel mode only)

When somebody calls your machine, you and
your caller will hear the normal telephone ring
sound. The number of rings is set by the Ring
Delay setting.
If the call is a fax, then your machine will
receive it; however, if it is a voice call the
machine will sound the F/T ring (a fast
double-ring) for the time you have set in the
F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the F/T ring
it means that you have a voice caller on the
line.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display Ring Delay.
Press Ring Delay.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 for how many times
the line rings before the machine
answers.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display
F/T Ring Time.
Press F/T Ring Time.

Press how long the machine will ring to
alert you that you have a voice call (20,
30, 40 or 70 seconds).

Press Stop/Exit.

e
f

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
Choose 0 in step e to have the machine
answer immediately.

Because the F/T ring is made by the machine,
extension and external telephones will not
ring; however, you can still answer the call on
any telephone. (For more information see
Using Remote Codes on page 43.)

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Chapter 5

Easy Receive
If Easy Receive is On:

The machine can receive a fax automatically,
even if you answer the call. When you see
Receiving on the LCD or hear a click on the
phone line through the handset you are
using, just replace the handset. Your
machine will do the rest.

If Easy Receive is Off:

If you are at the machine and answer a fax
call first by lifting the external handset, then
press Black Start or Color Start, and then
press Receive to receive the Fax.
If you answered at an extension telephone
press l51.

Note
• If this feature is set to On, but your
machine does not connect a fax call when
you lift an extension telephone handset,
press the fax receive code l51.
• If you send faxes from a computer on the
same telephone line and the machine
intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display Easy Receive.
Press Easy Receive.

e
f

Press On (or Off).

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Stop/Exit.

Telephone services and external
devices

Telephone line
services
Voice Mail
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone
line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and
the Brother machine will conflict with each
other when receiving incoming calls.
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to
answer after 4 rings and your Brother
machine is set to answer after 2 rings, then
your Brother machine will answer first. This
will prevent callers from being able to leave a
message in your Voice Mail.
Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to
answer after 4 rings and your Voice Mail is set
to answer after 2 rings, then your Voice Mail
will answer first. This will prevent your Brother
machine from being able to receive an
incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot
transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother
machine.

Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate
Number Ringing. This service establishes a
second telephone number on the same line
as your existing telephone number, and each
number has its own ring pattern. Typically,
the original number rings with the standard
ring pattern and is used for receiving voice
calls, and the second number rings with a
different ring pattern and is used for receiving
faxes. (See Distinctive Ring on page 38.)
OR
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to
"Manual". Manual Mode requires that you
answer every incoming call if you want to be
able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a
telephone call, then complete the call as you
normally would. If you hear fax sending tones
you must transfer the call to the Brother
machine. (See Using external and extension
telephones on page 42.) Unanswered fax
and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail. (To
set the machine in MANUAL Mode, see
Choose the correct Receive Mode
on page 32.)

To avoid conflicts between your Brother
machine and your Voice Mail service, do one
of the following:
Get the Distinctive Ring service from your
telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a
feature of your Brother machine that allows a
person with one line to receive fax and voice
calls through two different telephone
numbers on that one line. Brother uses the
term ’Distinctive Ring,’ but telephone
companies market the service under a variety
of names, such as Custom Ringing,
Personalized Ring, Smart Ring, RingMaster,
Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data Ident-A-Call,

Chapter 6

Distinctive Ring

Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother
machine that allows a person with one line to
receive fax and voice calls through two
different phone numbers on that one line.
Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring," but
telephone companies market the service
under a variety of names, such as Smart
Ring, Ring Master or Ident-a-Ring. This
service establishes a second telephone
number on the same line as your existing
telephone number, and each number has its
own ring pattern. Typically, the original
number rings with the standard ring pattern
and is used for receiving voice calls, and the
second number rings with a different ring
pattern and is used for receiving faxes.

Note
You must pay for your telephone
company’s Distinctive Ring service before
you program the machine to work with it.

Do you have Voice Mail?
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line
that you will install your new machine on,
there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail
and the machine will conflict with each other
while receiving incoming calls. However, the
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use
more than one number on your line, so
both Voice Mail and the machine can work
together without any problems. If each one
has a separate telephone number, neither will
interfere with the other’s operations.

Note

• Please call your telephone company for
availability and rates.

Your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring
service allows you to have more than one
number on the same telephone line. If you
need more than one telephone number, it
is cheaper than paying for an extra line.
Each telephone number has its own
distinctive ring pattern, so you will know
which telephone number is ringing. This is
one way you can have a separate telephone
number for your machine.

Note
Please call your telephone company for
availability and rates.

The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring
feature that allows you to use your machine to
take full advantage of the telephone
company’s Distinctive Ring service. The new
telephone number on your line can just
receive faxes.

• You must pay for your telephone
company's Distinctive Ring service before
you program the machine to work with it.

What does your telephone company’s
‘Distinctive Ring’ do?

What does Brother’s ‘distinctive ring’
do?

If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring
service from the telephone company, you will
need to follow the directions below to
‘register’ the new Distinctive Ring pattern
they give you. This is so your machine can
recognize its incoming calls.

Note
You can change or cancel the Distinctive
Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it
off temporarily, and turn it back on later.
When you get a new fax number, make
sure you reset this feature.

Telephone services and external devices

Before you choose the ring pattern to
register
You can only register one Distinctive Ring
pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns
cannot be registered. The ring patterns below
are supported by your Brother machine.
Register the one your telephone company
gives you.
Ring
Pattern

Rings

long-long

short-long-short

3
4

Registering the distinctive ring pattern
Very important!
After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature
to On, your Distinctive Ring number will
receive faxes automatically. The receive
mode is automatically set to Manual and you
cannot change it to another receive mode
while Distinctive Ring is set to On. This
ensures the Brother machine will only answer
the Distinctive Ring number and not interfere
when your main telephone number is called.
Press MENU.

short-short-long

a
b

very long
(normal pattern)

Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
Press Miscellaneous.

d
e
f

Press Distinctive.

Note
• Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short
and is the most commonly used.
• If the ring pattern you received is not on
this chart, please call your telephone
company and ask for one that is
shown.
 The machine will only answer calls to its
registered number.
 The first two rings are silent on the
machine. This is because the fax must
<> to the ring pattern (to compare
it to the pattern that was ‘registered’).
(Other telephones on the same line will
ring.)

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Set.
Press the stored ring pattern you want to
use.
Press OK.
(You will hear each pattern as you press
four buttons. Make sure you choose the
pattern that the telephone company
gave you.)
Press Stop/Exit.
Distinctive Ring is now set to On.

 If you program the machine properly, it will
recognize the registered ring pattern of the
‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns and
then answer with a fax tone. When the
‘voice number’ is called, the machine will
not answer.

Chapter 6

Turning off distinctive ring

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
Press Miscellaneous.

d
e
f

Press Distinctive.
Press Off.
Press Stop/Exit.

Note
If you do not want to receive faxes on your
Distinctive Ring number, you can turn off
Distinctive Ring. The machine will stay in
Manual receive mode so you will need to
set the Receive Mode again. (See Choose
the correct Receive Mode on page 32.)

Connecting an external
TAD (telephone
answering device)
You can connect an external Telephone
Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as
your machine. When the TAD answers a call,
your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax
calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine.
If it hears them it will take over the call and
receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will
let your TAD take a voice message and the
display will show Telephone.
The external TAD must answer within four
rings (we recommend you set it to two rings).
This is because your machine cannot hear
the CNG tones until the external TAD has
picked up the call. The sending machine will
send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds
longer. We do not recommend using the toll
saver feature on your external TAD if it needs
more than four rings to activate it.
Unless you are using Distinctive Ring, the
TAD must be connected to the EXT. jack of
the machine.
Before you connect an external TAD
(telephone answering device), remove the
protective cap (2) from the EXT. jack on the
machine.

1
1
2
1
2

TAD
Protective Cap

Note
If you have problems receiving faxes,
reduce the ring delay setting on your
external TAD.

Telephone services and external devices

Connections
The external TAD must be plugged into the
back of the machine, into the jack labeled
EXT. Your machine cannot work properly if
you plug the TAD into a wall jack (unless you
are using Distinctive Ring).

Plug the telephone line cord from the
telephone wall jack into the back of the
machine, in the jack labeled LINE.

Plug the telephone line cord from your
external TAD into the back of the
machine, in the jack labeled EXT. (Make
sure this cord is connected to the TAD at
the TAD’s telephone line jack, and not
its handset jack.)

Set your external TAD to four rings or
less. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting
does not apply.)

Record the outgoing message on your
external TAD.

e
f

Set the TAD to answer calls.
Set the Receive Mode to
External TAD. (See Choose the
correct Receive Mode on page 32.)

Recording an outgoing
message (OGM)

Record 5 seconds of silence at the
beginning of your message. This allows
your machine time to listen for fax tones.

b
c

Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
End your 20-second message by giving
your Fax Receive Code for people
sending manual faxes. For example:
“After the beep, leave a message or
press l51 and Start to send a fax.”

Note

We recommend beginning your OGM with
an initial 5 second silence because the
machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud
voice. You may try leaving out this pause,
but if your machine has trouble receiving,
then you should re-record the OGM to
include it.

Multi-line connections (PBX)

We suggest you ask the company who
installed your PBX to connect your machine.
If you have a multi line system we suggest
you ask the installer to connect the unit to the
last line on the system. This prevents the
machine being activated each time the
system receives telephone calls. If all
incoming calls will be answered by a
switchboard operator we recommend that
you set the Receive Mode to Manual.
We cannot guarantee that your machine will
operate properly under all circumstances
when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties
with sending or receiving faxes should be
reported first to the company who handles
your PBX.

Chapter 6

External and extension
telephones
Connecting an external or
extension telephone

Using an external telephone
(Connected to the EXT. jack of the
machine)

You can connect a separate telephone
directly to your machine as shown in the
diagram below.

Before you connect an external telephone,
remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT.
jack on the machine.

If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at the external telephone by
pressing Hook.

If you answer a call and no one is on
the line:

External telephone

Protective Cap

Press l51 and wait for the chirp or until the
LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.

Note
You can also use the Easy Receive
feature to make your machine
automatically take the call. (See Easy
Receive on page 36.)

When you are using an external telephone,
the LCD shows Telephone.

Using external and extension
telephones
Using extension telephones
If you answer a fax call at an extension
telephone, you can make your machine
receive the fax by pressing the Fax Receive
Code l51.

You should assume that you’re receiving a
manual fax.

3
Extension telephone

If you answer a fax call at the external
telephone connected to the EXT jack of the
machine, you can make the machine receive
the fax by pressing Black Start or
Color Start and choosing Receive.

Connect the telephone line cord to the jack
labeled EXT.

If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at an extension telephone by
pressing the Telephone Answer Code #51.
(See F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)
on page 35.)

Using a non-Brother cordless
external handset
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is
connected to the EXT. jack of the machine
(see page 42) and you typically carry the
cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to
answer calls during the Ring Delay.
If you let the machine answer first, you will
have to go to the machine so you can press
Hook to transfer the call to the cordless
handset.

Telephone services and external devices

Using Remote Codes
Fax Receive Code

If you answer a fax call on an extension
telephone, you can tell your machine to
receive it by pressing the Fax Receive
Code l51. Wait for the chirping sounds then
replace the handset. (See Easy Receive
on page 36.)
If you answer a fax call at the external
telephone, you can make the machine
receive the fax by pressing Black Start or
Color Start.

Telephone Answer Code

If you receive a voice call and the machine is
in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T
(double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you
pick up the call on an extension telephone
you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing #51
(make sure you press this between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at the external telephone by
pressing Hook.

Changing the Remote Codes

The preset Fax Receive Code is l51. The
preset Telephone Answer Code is #51. If you
are always disconnected when accessing
your External TAD, try changing the
three-digit remote codes, for example ###
and 999.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display Remote Codes.
Press Remote Codes.

e
f

Press On (or Off).

Enter the new Telephone Answer Code.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

If you chose On in step e, enter the new
Fax Receive Code.
Press OK.

Dialing and storing numbers

How to dial

You can dial in any of the following ways.

Manual dialing

Speed dialing

a
b

Press Address Book.

Press Send a fax or
Send a E-mail.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Use the dial pad to enter all the digits of the
telephone or fax number.

Press the three-digit number you want
to call. You can also display the
numbers in alphabetical order by
pressing
on the Touchscreen.

Note
If the LCD shows Not Registered
when you enter or search a Speed Dial
number, a number has not been stored at
this location.

One touch dialing

Press the One Touch key that stores the
number you want to call. (See Storing
One Touch Dial numbers on page 48.)

To dial One Touch numbers 21 to 40, hold
down 21-40 as you press the One Touch key.

Dialing and storing numbers

You can search alphabetically for names you
have stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial
memories. (See Storing One Touch Dial
numbers on page 48 and Storing Speed Dial
numbers on page 50.)

a
b
c

Press Address Book.

Press a or b to scroll until you find the
name you are looking for.
Press the name you are looking for.

Press Send a fax or
Send a E-mail.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Press

Fax redial

If you are sending a fax manually and the line
is busy, press Redial/Pause and try it again.
You can call the last number dialed, by
pressing Redial/Pause.
Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from
the control panel.
If you are sending a fax automatically and the
line is busy, the machine will automatically
redial one time after five minutes.

on the Touchscreen.

Press the first few letters of the name on
the Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Note
• If the LCD shows
Results cannot be found. when
you enter the first few letters of the name,
it means that a name for the letter is not
stored.
• One Touch Dial number and Speed Dial
numbers stored without the name cannot
be retrieved by the search function.

LDAP search

If the machine is connected to your LDAP
server, you can search for information such
as fax numbers and E-mail addresses from
your server. (For details about how to set up
LDAP see the Network User's Guide.)

Chapter 7

Storing numbers

You can set up your machine to do the
following types of easy dialing: One Touch,
Speed Dial and Groups for Broadcasting
faxes. You can also specify the default
resolution for each One Touch and Speed
Dial number. When you dial a quick dial
number, the LCD shows the name, if you
stored it, or the number. A scan profile can
also be stored along with the fax number.
If you lose electrical power, the quick dial
numbers stored in the memory will not be lost.
A scan profile is the resolution and other scan
settings that you choose when you store a
number.

Storing a pause
Press Pause to insert a 3.5-second pause
between numbers. You can press Pause as
many times as needed to increase the length
of the pause.

Dialing and storing numbers

One Touch and Speed Dial Storage Options

The following chart shows the selections for the settings for One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
When you store numbers, the LCD instructs you to choose from the options shown in the following
steps.
Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Enter Name

Select Registration
Type

Enter Number or
E-mail Address

Select Resolution

Select File type

Enter the name
you want to
store

Fax

Enter the Fax
Number

Standard, Fine,
S.Fine, Photo

IFAX

Enter the E-mail
Address

Standard, Fine,
Photo

E-Mail B&W PDF

200 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi

PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF,
Signed PDF

E-Mail B&W TIFF

200 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi

E-Mail Color PDF

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi, 600 dpi

PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF,
Signed PDF

E-Mail Color JPEG

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi, 600 dpi

E-Mail Color XPS

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi, 600 dpi

E-Mail Gray PDF

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi

PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF,
Signed PDF

E-Mail Gray JPEG

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi

E-Mail Gray XPS

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi

or
Press OK

Note
• If you choose Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine using Web Based
Management. Choose Configure Signed PDF Settings from Administrator Settings in Web
Based Management. For how to install a certificate, see the Network User's Guide.
• PDF/A is a PDF file format intended for long-term archiving. This format contains all the
necessary information to be able to reproduce the document after long-term storage.
• A Signed PDF helps prevent data tampering and the impersonation of an author by including
a digital certificate within the document.

Chapter 7

Storing One Touch Dial
numbers

Press d or c to select
Fax,
IFAX,
E-Mail B&W PDF,
E-Mail B&W TIFF,
E-Mail Color PDF,
E-Mail Color JPEG,
E-Mail Color XPS,
E-Mail Gray PDF,
E-Mail Gray JPEG,
E-Mail Gray XPS.

Enter the telephone, fax number (up to
20 characters each) or E-mail address
(up to 60 characters each). Use the
chart on Entering text on page 172 to
help you enter letters.
Press OK.

Your machine has 20 One Touch keys where
you can store 40 fax or telephone numbers or
E-mail addresses for automatic dialing. To
access numbers 21 to 40, hold down 21-40
as you press the One Touch key.

Press the One Touch key where you
want to store the number or E-mail
address.
If a number or E-mail address is not
stored there, the LCD shows
Not Registered
Register Now?.
Press Yes.
Or, you can use the LCD buttons by
pressing Address Book, More and
Set One Touch Dial, and then
enter the number of the One Touch key
where you want to store the number or
E-mail address and press OK.

Note
If the One Touch number you choose is
already taken, the OK button on the LCD
will not work. Choose a different number.

Do one of the following:
 Enter the name (up to 15 characters)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen. Use the chart on
Entering text on page 172 to help
you enter letters.
Press OK.
 Press OK to store the number or
E-mail address without a name.

Note
• If you selected an E-mail Registration
Type in step c and save the E-mail
address, you can only use the E-mail
address when you are in Scan mode.
• If you selected the IFAX Registration Type
in step c and save the E-mail address,
you can only use the E-mail address when
you are in Fax mode.

Dialing and storing numbers

To save a fax/scan resolution along with
the fax number/E-mail address, go to
the appropriate step as shown in the
following table.

Option selected in step c

IFAX

 If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG
or E-Mail Color XPS, go to
step l.

E-Mail B&W TIFF
i

 If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or
E-Mail Gray XPS, go to step l.

E-Mail Color XPS
E-Mail Gray PDF
E-Mail Gray JPEG

E-Mail Gray XPS

Note
• When you do a broadcast and you have
saved a scan profile along with the
number or E-mail address, the scan profile
of the One Touch, Speed Dial or Group
number you chose first will be applied to
the broadcast.
• For details about the file format, see Using
the SCAN key in the Software User's
Guide.

Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine, S.Fine or Photo and go to
step l.

Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine or Photo and go to step l.

Select the resolution from 200 dpi or
200 x 100 dpi.

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi or 300 dpi.
 If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go
to step k.

E-Mail Color PDF
E-Mail Color JPEG

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.
 If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,
go to step k.

Go to step

Fax

E-Mail B&W PDF

Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF or Signed PDF that will
be used to send to your PC.

Note
If you choose Secure PDF, the machine
will ask you to enter a fou-digit password
using numbers 0-9 before it starts
scanning.

When the LCD displays your settings,
press OK to confirm.

Press Stop/Exit.

 If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go
to step k.
 If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go
to step l.

Chapter 7

Storing Speed Dial numbers
You can store your frequently used numbers
as Speed Dial numbers, so that when you dial
you will only have to press a few keys (for
example: press Address Book, the number
you want to call and Send a fax). The
machine can store 300 Speed Dial numbers
(001-300).

a
b
c
d

Press Address Book.
Press More.

 Press OK to store the number or
E-mail address without a name.

• If you selected the IFAX Registration Type
in step e and save the E-mail address,
you can only use the E-mail address when
you are in Fax mode.

To save a fax/scan resolution along with
the fax number/E-mail address, go to
the appropriate step as shown in the
following table.

Do one of the following:

Press OK.

• If you selected an E-mail Registration
Type in step e and save the E-mail
address, you can only use the E-mail
address when you are in Scan mode.

Press Set Speed Dial.

 Enter the name (up to 15 characters)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen. Use the chart on
Entering text on page 172 to help
you enter letters.

Note

Press d or c to select
Fax,
IFAX,
E-Mail B&W PDF,
E-Mail B&W TIFF,
E-Mail Color PDF,
E-Mail Color JPEG,
E-Mail Color XPS,
E-Mail Gray PDF,
E-Mail Gray JPEG,
E-Mail Gray XPS.
Enter the fax/telephone number (up to
20 characters each) or E-mail address
(up to 60 characters each). Use the
chart on Entering text on page 172 to
help you enter letters.
Press OK.

Option selected in step e

Go to step

Fax

IFAX

E-Mail B&W PDF

E-Mail B&W TIFF
E-Mail Color PDF
E-Mail Color JPEG

E-Mail Color XPS
E-Mail Gray PDF
E-Mail Gray JPEG

E-Mail Gray XPS

Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine, S.Fine or Photo and go to
step n.

Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine or Photo and go to step n.

Dialing and storing numbers

Select the resolution from 200 dpi or
200 x 100 dpi.
 If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go
to step m.
 If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go
to step n.

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.
 If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,
go to step m.
 If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG
or E-Mail Color XPS, go to
step n.

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi or 300 dpi.
 If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go
to step m.
 If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or
E-Mail Gray XPS, go to step n.

Changing or Deleting One
Touch and Speed Dial
numbers
You can change or delete a One Touch or
Speed Dial number that has already been
stored.
If the stored number has a scheduled job,
such as a delayed fax or a fax forwarding
number, it will be dimmed on the LCD. You
cannot select the number to make changes or
to delete it unless you first cancel the
scheduled job. (See Checking and canceling
waiting jobs in chapter 3 of the Advanced
User's Guide.)

a
b
c

Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF or Signed PDF that will
be used to send to your PC.

Press Stop/Exit.

Do one of the following:

Select the number you want to delete
by pressing it to display a red check
mark.
Press OK.
When Erase This Data?
appears, press Yes to accept it.

Enter a three-digit Speed Dial location
number (001-300).
Press OK.
When the LCD displays your settings,
press OK to confirm.

Press More.

 Press Delete to delete all
information in a Speed Dial or One
Touch number.

Note

Press Address Book.

 Press Change to edit the name,
number or E-mail address and go to
step d.

If you choose Secure PDF, the machine
will ask you to enter a four-digit password
using numbers 0-9 before it starts
scanning.

Go to step h.

Press a or b to display the number you
want to change.
Press the number you want to change.

Note
One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.
Speed Dial numbers begin with #.

Chapter 7

Press Name:
Number/Address:
Resolution: or
PDF Type:

Do one of the following:
 If you chose Name:, enter the name
(up to 15 characters) by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
 If you chose Number/Address:,
enter the new number (up to 20
digits) or E-mail address (up to 60
digits) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
 If you chose Resolution:, press
one of the available resolution
options displayed on the
Touchscreen.
 If you chose PDF Type:, press one
of the available file type options
displayed on the Touchscreen.

Note
How to change the stored name or
number:
If you want to change a character, press
d or c to position the cursor under the
character you want to change, and then
press
. Re-enter the character.
The LCD will display your new setting.

Do one of the following:
 When you are finished making
changes, press OK.
 To change more details, go to
step f.

Press Stop/Exit.

Making copies
c

How to copy

Press Black Start or Color Start.

The following steps show the basic copy
operation. For details about each option, see
Advanced User's Guide.

When you want to make a copy, press
(COPY) to illuminate it in blue.
 Make sure you are in Copy mode.

Note
If the LCD shows Please Wait and the
machine stops copying while you are
making multiple copies, please wait for 30
to 40 seconds until the machine finishes
the color registrations and cleaning
process of the belt unit.

Stop copying

To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.

Copy settings
 The LCD shows:
Favorite

Copy
Quality

Enlarge/
Reduce

Duplex Copy

Auto

100%

Off

Press COPY and then press d or c to choose
the setting you want. For details about
changing the copy settings, see Copy
settings in Chapter 7 of the Advanced User's
Guide.
You can change the following copy settings:
 Quality

You can enter the number of copies
you want by pressing the + and buttons on the Touchscreen.

 Enlarge/Reduce
 Duplex Copy
 Tray Use

Note
The default setting is Fax mode. You can
change the amount of time that the
machine stays in Copy mode after the last
copy operation. (See Mode Timer in
Chapter 1 of the Advanced User's Guide.)

Do one of the following to load your
document:
 Place the document face up in the
ADF. (See Using the automatic
document feeder (ADF) on page 26.)

 Brightness
 Contrast
 Stack/Sort
 Page Layout
 2in1(ID) (Page Layout)
 Color Adjust (Saturation)
 Set New Default
 Factory Reset
 Favorite Settings

 Load your document face down on
the scanner glass. (See Using the
scanner glass on page 27.)

Printing data from a USB Flash
memory drive or digital camera
supporting mass storage
b

With the Direct Print feature, you do not need
a computer to print data. You can print by just
plugging your USB Flash memory drive into
the machine’s USB direct interface. You can
also connect and print directly from a camera
set to USB mass storage mode.

Choose Brother MFC-XXXX Printer (1)
and check the Print to file box (2).
Click Print.
1

Note

• Some USB Flash memory drives may not
work with the machine.
• If your camera is in PictBridge mode, you
cannot print data. Please refer to the
documentation supplied with your camera
to switch from PictBridge mode to mass
storage mode.

Creating a PRN or
PostScript® 3™ file for
direct printing
Note
The screens in this section may vary
depending on your application and
operating system.

From the menu bar of an application,
click File, then Print.

Choose the folder you want to save the
file to and enter the file name if you are
prompted to.
If you are prompted for a file name only,
you can also specify the folder you want
to save the file in by entering the
directory name. For example:
C:\Temp\FileName.prn
If you have a USB Flash memory drive
or digital camera connected to your
computer, you can save the file directly
to the USB Flash memory drive.

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage

Printing data directly
from the USB Flash
memory drive or digital
camera supporting
mass storage
a

Note
• Make sure your digital camera is turned
on.

Connect your USB Flash memory drive
or digital camera to the USB direct
interface (1) on the front of the machine.
Press Direct Print. Your machine
will enter Direct Print Mode.

• If your machine has been set to Secure
Function Lock On, you may not be able to
access Direct Print. (For explanations
about error messages that may occur, see
Switching Users in chapter 2 of the
Advanced User's Guide.)

Press a or b to choose the folder name
and file name you want to print.
If you have chosen the folder name,
press a or b to choose the file name you
want to print.

Note
• Your digital camera must be switched
from PictBridge mode to mass storage
mode.

• If you want to print an index of the files,
press Index Print on the
Touchscreen. Press Black Start or
Color Start to print the data.

• When the machine is in Deep Sleep
mode, the LCD does not show any
information even if you connect a USB
flash memory drive to the USB direct
interface. Press the Touchscreen or any
key to wake up the machine. Press
Direct Print on the Touchscreen, the
LCD will show the Direct Print menu.

Enter the number of copies you want by
pressing the + and - buttons on the
Touchscreen.

Do one of the following:
 Press Print Settings. Go to
step e.
 If you do not need to change the
current default settings, go to
step g.

Chapter 9

Press a or b to display an option setting
you need to change.
Press the option and change the setting.

Changing the default settings
for direct print

Note

You can change the default settings for Direct
Print.

• You can choose the following settings:
Paper Size

Connect your USB Flash memory drive
or digital camera to the USB direct
interface on the front of the machine.

b
c
d

Press Direct Print on the LCD.

Press the new option you want. Repeat
steps d to e for each setting you want
to change.

Paper Type
Multiple Page
Orientation
Duplex
Collate
Tray Use
Print Quality
PDF Option
• Depending on the file type, some of
these settings may not appear.

Do one of the following:
 If you want to change other option
settings repeat step e.
 If you do not want to change any
other options, press
and go to
step g.

Press Black Start or Color Start to
print the data.

IMPORTANT
• To prevent damage to your machine, DO
NOT connect any device other than a
digital camera or USB Flash memory drive
to the USB direct interface.
• DO NOT remove the USB Flash memory
drive or digital camera from the USB direct
interface until the machine has finished
printing.

Press Default Settings.
Press a or b to display the setting you
want to change.
Press the setting.

Note
How to display all available options:
When the LCD displays the d and c
buttons, press d or c to display all
available options.

How to print from a computer

Printing a document

The machine can receive data from your
computer and print it. To print from a
computer, install the printer driver. (See
Printing for Windows ® or Printing and Faxing
for Macintosh in the Software User's Guide
for details about the print settings.)

Install the Brother printer driver on the
Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.)

From your application, choose the Print
command.

Choose the name of your machine in the
Print dialog box and click Properties.

Choose the settings you want in the
Properties dialog box.
 Paper Size
 Orientation
 Copies

 Media Type
 Print Quality
 Color / Mono
 Multiple Page
 Duplex / Booklet
 Paper Source
Click OK.

Click OK to begin printing.

How to scan to a computer

Scanning a document

There are several ways to scan documents.
You can use the
(SCAN) key on the
machine or the scanner drivers on your
computer.

To use the machine as a scanner, install
a scanner driver. If the machine is on a
Network, configure it with a TCP/IP
address.

Scanning using the
scan key
For more information, see Using the Scan
key in the Software User's Guide.

a
b

 FTP
 E-mail (Server)
 E-mail (Scan to PC)
 Image (Scan to PC)
 OCR 1 (Scan to PC)
 File (Scan to PC)

Load your document. (See How to load
documents on page 26.)

 Use the ADF to scan multiple pages
of documents. The ADF feeds each
sheet automatically.

Do one of the following:
 To scan using the
(SCAN)
key, go to Scanning using the scan
key on page 58.
 To scan using a scanner driver at
your computer, go to Scanning using
a scanner driver on page 59.

Choose the scan mode you want.
Scan to:
 Network

 Configure the machine with a TCP/IP
address if network scanning does not
work. (See Configuring Network
Scanning in the Software User's
Guide.)

 Use the scanner glass to scan a
page of a book or one sheet at a
time.

(SCAN) key.

 USB

 Install the scanner drivers on the
Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide and Scanning in the
Software User's Guide.)

Press the

(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you download
and install Presto! PageManager from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/
PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg

(For network users)
Choose the computer you want to send
the data to.

Press Black Start or Color Start to
begin scanning.

How to scan to a computer

Scanning using a
scanner driver

For more information, see Scanning a
document using the TWAIN driver, Scanning
a document using the WIA driver or Scanning
a document using the ICA driver in the
Software User's Guide.

Start a scanning application and click
the Scan button.

Adjust the settings such as Resolution,
Brightness, and Scan Type in the
Scanner Setup dialog box.

Click Start or Scan to begin scanning.

Routine maintenance

Replacing the consumable items

The following messages appear on the LCD in the Ready mode. These messages provide
advanced warnings to replace the consumable items before they reach the end of their life. To
avoid any inconvenience, you may want to buy spare consumable items before the machine stops
printing.
Toner cartridge
See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 64.
Order No. TN-310BK, TN-315BK, TN-310C,
TN-315C, TN-310M, TN-315M, TN-310Y, TN-315Y

Drum unit
See Replacing the drum unit on page 75.
Order No. DR-310CL

Belt unit

Waste toner box

See Replacing the belt unit on page 82.

See Replacing the waste toner box on page 88.

Order No. BU-300CL

Order No. WT-300CL

Routine maintenance

LCD messages

Consumable item
to replace

Approximate life

How to replace

Order No.

Toner Low

Toner cartridge

See page 64.

TN-310BK 3,

Prepare New
Toner
Cartridge.X

X = Black, Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow

2,500 pages 1 2 3

TN-315BK 4,
TN-310C 3,

6,000 pages 1 2 4

TN-315C 4,

TN-310M 3,
TN-315M 4,
TN-310Y 3,

1,500 pages 1 2 3

TN-315Y 4

3,500 pages 1 2 4
Replace Parts
Waste toner box
WT Box End Soon

50,000 pages 1

See page 88.

Letter or A4 size single-sided pages.

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Standard toner cartridge

High capacity toner cartridge

WT-300CL

You will need to clean the machine regularly and replace the consumable items when the following
messages are displayed on the LCD.
LCD messages

Consumable item
to replace

Approximate life

How to replace

Order No.

Replace TonerX

Toner cartridge

See page 64.

TN-310BK 5,

X = Black, Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow

2,500 pages 1 2 5

TN-315BK 6,
TN-310C 5,

6,000 pages 1 2 6

TN-315C 6,

TN-310M 5,
TN-315M 6,

1,500 pages 1 2 5

TN-310Y 5,

3,500 pages 1 2 6

TN-315Y 6

Drum unit

25,000 pages 1 3 4

See page 76.

DR-310CL

Replace Parts
Belt Unit

Belt unit

50,000 pages 1

See page 82.

BU-300CL

Replace WT Box

Waste toner box

50,000 pages 1

See page 88.

WT-300CL

Replace Parts
Fuser Unit

Fuser unit

100,000 pages 1

Call your dealer or Brother Customer
Service for a replacement fuser unit.

Replace Parts
Laser Unit

Laser unit

100,000 pages 1

Call your dealer or Brother Customer
Service for a replacement laser unit.

Replace Parts
PF Kit 1

Paper feeding kit 1

100,000 pages 1

Call your dealer or Brother Customer
Service for a replacement paper feeding
kit 1.

Replace Parts
PF Kit 2

Paper feeding kit 2

100,000 pages 1

Call your dealer or Brother Customer
Service for a replacement paper feeding
kit 2.

Replace Parts
PF Kit MP

Paper feeding kit
MP

50,000 pages 1

Call your dealer or Brother Customer
Service for a replacement paper feeding
kit MP.

Replace Parts
Drum Unit
Drum Stop

Letter or A4 size single-sided pages.

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

1 page per job.

Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

Standard toner cartridge

High capacity toner cartridge

Routine maintenance

Note
• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/index.html for instructions on how to return your used
consumable items to the Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used
consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it
separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.
• We recommend placing used consumable items on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally
spilling or scattering the material inside.
• If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended paper, the life of
consumable items and machine parts may be reduced.
• The projected life of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of
replacement will vary depending on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage
and type of media used.

Replacing a Toner cartridge
Order No. For the Order No. of toner
cartridges, see Replacing the consumable
items on page 60.
The Standard toner cartridges can print
approximately 2,500 pages (black) or
approximately 1,500 pages (cyan, magenta,
yellow) 1. The High Yield toner cartridges can
print approximately 6,000 pages (black) or
approximately 3,500 pages (cyan, magenta,
yellow) 1. Actual page count will vary
depending on your average type of
document. When a toner cartridge is running
low, the LCD shows Toner Low.
The toner cartridges that come supplied with
the machine are standard toner cartridges.
1

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance
with ISO/IEC 19798.

Note
• It is a good idea to keep a new toner
cartridge ready for use when you see the
Toner Low warning.
• To ensure high quality printing, we
recommend that you use only Genuine
Brother Brand toner cartridges. When you
want to buy toner cartridges, please call
Brother Customer Service.
• We recommend that you clean the
machine when you replace the toner
cartridge. See Cleaning and Checking the
machine in Appendix A of the Advanced
User's Guide.
• If you change the print density setting for
lighter or darker printing, the amount of
toner used will change.
• Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until
immediately before you put it into the
machine.

Toner Low

If the LCD shows Toner Low
Prepare New Toner Cartridge.X, buy
a new toner cartridge and have it ready
before you get a Replace Toner message.
The LCD indicates the toner color that is near
the end of its life (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or
Black).

Replace Toner

When the LCD shows Replace Toner the
machine will stop printing until you replace
the toner cartridge. The message on the LCD
will indicate which color you need to replace.
A new or unused genuine Brother toner
cartridge will reset the Replace Toner mode.

Routine maintenance

Replacing the toner cartridges

Make sure that the machine is turned
on.

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge
and slightly push it toward the machine
to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum
unit. Repeat this for all the toner
cartridges.

IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean,
flat, level, stable surface with a sheet of
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
immediately wipe or wash it off with cold
water.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustration.

WARNING
DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It
could explode, resulting in injuries.
DO NOT use cleaning materials that
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of
spray or any type of flammable substance
to clean the inside or outside of the
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
See To use the product safely in the Safety
and Legal Booklet for how to clean the
machine.

Be careful not to inhale toner.

Note
• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge
tightly in a suitable bag so that toner
powder does not spill out of the cartridge.
• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/
index.html for instructions on how to return
your used consumable items to the
Brother collection program. If you choose
not to return your used consumable,
please discard the used consumable
according to local regulations, keeping it
separate from domestic waste. If you have
questions, call your local waste disposal
office.

Routine maintenance

Push to release the latches of the
corona wire cover (1), and then open the
cover.

Clean the corona wires inside the drum
unit by gently sliding the green tabs from
left to right and right to left several times.

Note
Be sure to return the tab to the home
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed
pages may have a vertical stripe.

Close the corona wire cover.

IMPORTANT
• Wait to unpack the new toner cartridge
until immediately before you put it in the
machine. If a toner cartridge is left
unpacked for a long time, the toner life will
be shortened.
• If an unpacked drum unit is put in direct
sunlight or room light, the unit may be
damaged.
• Brother strongly recommends that you
DO NOT refill the toner cartridge provided
with your machine. We also strongly
recommend that you continue to use only
Genuine Brother Brand replacement toner
cartridges. Use or attempted use of
potentially incompatible toner and/or
cartridges in the Brother machine may
cause damage to the machine and/or may
result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our
warranty coverage does not apply to any
problem that is caused by the use of
unauthorized third party toner and/or
cartridges. To protect your investment and
obtain premium performance from the
Brother machine, we strongly recommend
the use of Genuine Brother Supplies.

Repeat steps e to g to clean each of
three remaining corona wires.

Unpack the new toner cartridge. Gently
shake it from side to side several times
to distribute the toner evenly inside the
cartridge.

Pull off the protective cover.

Routine maintenance

IMPORTANT
Put the toner cartridge in the drum unit
immediately after you have removed the
protective cover. To prevent any
degradation to the print quality, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

C
M
Y
K

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge
and slide the toner cartridge into the
drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you
until you hear it click into place. Make
sure that you match the toner cartridge
color to the same color label on the drum
unit. Repeat this for all the toner
cartridges.

C - Cyan

M - Magenta

Y - Yellow

K - Black

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Cleaning the corona wires
If you have print quality problems, clean the
four corona wires as follows:

Close the front cover of the machine.

Note
After you replace a toner cartridge, DO
NOT turn off the machine's power switch
or open the front cover until the LCD
clears the Please Wait message and
returns to Ready mode.

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Routine maintenance

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge
and slightly push it toward the machine
to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum
unit. Repeat this for all the toner
cartridges.

Push to release the latches of the
corona wire cover (1), and then open the
cover.

Clean the corona wires inside the drum
unit by gently sliding the green tabs from
left to right and right to left several times.

Routine maintenance

Note

Close the corona wire cover.

Repeat steps d to f to clean each of
three remaining corona wires.

• Be sure to return the tab to the home
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed
pages may have a vertical stripe.
• We recommend that you clean the corona
wire for each color. If you want to clean
only the corona wire of the color that
caused the print quality problem, see the
illustration below to identify the position of
each of the corona wires.

C
c

m
Y
y
K
k

C: Corona wire for Cyan
M: Corona wire for Magenta
Y: Corona wire for Yellow
K: Corona wire for Black
c: Cyan toner position label
m: Magenta toner position label

y: Yellow toner position label
k: Black toner position label

The corona wires for black, yellow and
magenta are located under the next toner
cartridge. For example, when you clean
the corona wire for black, you need to
remove the yellow toner cartridge to
access the corona wire for black.

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Close the front cover of the machine.

C
M
Y
K

C - Cyan

M - Magenta

Y - Yellow

K - Black

Routine maintenance

Replacing the drum unit
Order No. DR-310CL
A new drum unit can print approximately
25,000 Letter or A4 size single-sided pages.

Note
• There are many factors that determine the
actual drum life, such as the temperature,
humidity, type of paper, type of toner used
and so on. Under ideal conditions, the
average drum life is estimated at
approximately 25,000 pages. The actual
number of pages that your drum will print
may be significantly less than this
estimate. Because we have no control
over the many factors that determine the
actual drum life, we cannot guarantee a
minimum number of pages that will be
printed by your drum.
• For best performance, use only genuine
Brother toner. The machine should be
used only in a clean, dust-free
environment with adequate ventilation.
• Printing with a non-Brother drum unit may
reduce not only the print quality but also
the quality and life of the machine itself.
Warranty coverage does not apply to
problems caused by the use of a
non-Brother drum unit.

Drum Error

The corona wires have become dirty. Clean
the corona wires in the drum unit. (See
Cleaning the corona wires on page 70.)
If you cleaned the corona wires and
Drum Error was not cleared then the drum
unit is at the end of its life. Replace the drum
unit with a new one.

Replace Parts
Drum

The drum unit has exceeded its rated life.
Please replace the drum unit with a new one.
We recommend a genuine Brother drum unit
be installed at this time.
After replacement, reset the drum counter by
following the instructions included with the
new drum unit.

Drum Stop

We cannot guarantee the print quality. Please
replace the drum unit with a new one. We
recommend a genuine Brother drum unit be
installed at this time.
After replacement, reset the drum counter by
following the instructions included with the
new drum unit.

Replacing the drum unit

IMPORTANT
• While removing the drum unit, handle it
carefully because it may contain toner. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
immediately wipe or wash it off with cold
water.
• Every time you replace the drum unit,
clean the inside of the machine. (See
Cleaning and Checking the machine in
Appendix A of the Advanced User's
Guide.)

Make sure that the machine is turned
on.

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Routine maintenance

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of
the machine counterclockwise to the
release position. Holding the green
handles of the drum unit, lift the front of
the drum unit and remove it from the
machine.
1

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge
and slightly push it to unlock it. Then pull
it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all
the toner cartridges.

• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

WARNING
DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It
could explode, resulting in injuries.
DO NOT use cleaning materials that
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of
spray, or any type of flammable substance
to clean the outside or inside of the
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
See To use the product safely in the Safety
and Legal Booklet for how to clean the
machine.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit
when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides
of the drum unit.
Be careful not to inhale toner.

Routine maintenance

IMPORTANT
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
immediately wipe or wash it off with cold
water.
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean,
flat surface with a sheet of disposable
paper or cloth underneath it in case you
accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

Note
• Be sure to seal up the used drum unit
tightly in a bag so that toner powder does
not spill out of the unit.
• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/
index.html for instructions on how to return
your used consumable items to the
Brother collection program. If you choose
not to return your used consumable,
please discard the used consumable
according to local regulations, keeping it
separate from domestic waste. If you have
questions, call your local waste disposal
office.

Unpack the new drum unit and remove
the protective cover.

• Wait to unpack the new drum unit until
immediately before you put it in the
machine. Exposure to direct sunlight or
room light may damage the drum unit.

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge
and slide the toner cartridge into the new
drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you
until you hear it click into place. Make
sure that you match the toner cartridge
color to the same color label on the drum
unit. Repeat this for all the toner
cartridges.

IMPORTANT
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.
C
M
Y
K

C - Cyan

M - Magenta

Y - Yellow

K - Black

Routine maintenance

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in
the release position as shown in the
illustration.

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise
to the lock position.

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum
unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of
the machine, then gently slide the drum
unit into the machine until it stops at the
green lock lever.

Close the front cover of the machine.

Resetting the drum counter
When you replace a drum unit with a new
one, you will need to reset the drum counter
by completing the following steps:

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Machine Info..
Press Machine Info..

Replacing the belt unit
Order No. BU-300CL
A new belt unit can print approximately
50,000 Letter or A4 size single-sided pages.

Replace Parts
Belt Unit
When the Replace Parts Belt Unit
message appears on the LCD, you will need
to replace the belt unit:

c
d
e

Press Reset Menu.

The machine will display
Reset Drum?.
Press Yes.

• DO NOT touch the surface of the belt unit.
If you touch it, it could degrade print
quality.

Press Stop/Exit.

• Damage caused by incorrect handling of
the belt unit may void your warranty.

Press Drum.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the machine is turned
on.

Routine maintenance

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean,
flat surface with a sheet of disposable
paper or cloth underneath it in case you
accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit
when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides
of the drum unit.

Routine maintenance

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

Hold the green handle of the belt unit
with both hands and lift the belt unit up,
then pull it out.

IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustration.

Unpack the new belt unit.

Put the new belt unit back in the
machine. Make sure the belt unit is level
and fits firmly into place.

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in
the release position as shown in the
illustration.

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum
unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of
the machine, then gently slide the drum
unit into the machine until it stops at the
green lock lever.

1
2

Routine maintenance

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise
to the lock position.

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Resetting the belt unit counter

When you replace a belt unit with a new one,
you will need to reset the belt unit counter by
completing the following steps:

a
b

Press MENU.

c
d
e

Press Reset Menu.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display
Machine Info..
Press Machine Info..

Press Belt Unit.
The machine will display
Reset Belt Unit?.
Press Yes.

Close the front cover of the machine.

Replacing the waste toner box

Order No. WT-300CL
A new waste toner box can print
approximately 50,000 Letter or A4 size
single-sided pages.

Replace Parts
WT Box End Soon

If the LCD shows Replace Parts
WT Box End Soon, it means the waste
toner box is near the end of its life. Buy a new
waste toner box and have it ready before you
get a Replace WT Box message.

Replace WT Box
When the Replace WT Box message
appears on the LCD, you will need to replace
the waste toner box:

WARNING
DO NOT put the waste toner box into a fire.
It could explode.
Be careful not to spill the toner. DO NOT
inhale or allow it to get into your eyes.

IMPORTANT
DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.

Make sure that the machine is turned
on.

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Routine maintenance

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit
when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides
of the drum unit.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

Routine maintenance

Hold the green handle of the belt unit
with both hands and lift the belt unit up,
then pull it out.

Remove the two pieces of orange
packing material and discard them.

IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustration.

Note
This step is only necessary when you are
replacing the waste toner box for the first
time, and are not required for the
replacement waste toner box. The orange
packing pieces are installed at the factory
to protect your machine during shipment.

Hold the green handle of the waste toner
box and remove the waste toner box
from the machine.

CAUTION
Handle the waste toner box carefully in
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
If toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
immediately wipe or wash it off with cold
water.

Note
Discard the used waste toner box
according to local regulations, keeping it
separate from domestic waste. If you have
questions, call your local waste disposal
office.

Unpack the new waste toner box and
put the new waste toner box in the
machine using the green handle. Make
sure the waste toner box is level and fits
firmly into place.

Routine maintenance

Put the belt unit back into the machine.
Make sure the belt unit is level and fits
firmly into place.

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in
the release position as shown in the
illustration.

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum
unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of
the machine, then gently slide the drum
unit into the machine until it stops at the
green lock lever.

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise
to the lock position.

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Close the front cover of the machine.

Troubleshooting

Error and maintenance messages

As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be
replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and
shows the appropriate message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown
below.
You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more help,
the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips:
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
Error Message

Cause

Action

Access Denied

The function you want to use is
restricted by Secure Function
Lock.

Contact your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.

Access Error

The device is removed from the
USB direct interface while the
data is processing.

Press Stop/Exit. Reinsert the device and try
to print with Direct Print.

Calibration
failed.

Calibration failed.

 Turn off the machine. Wait a few seconds,
then turn it on again.
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing
the drum unit on page 76.)
 Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the
belt unit on page 82.)
 Put in a new waste toner box. (See
Replacing the waste toner box
on page 88.)
 If the problem continues, call Brother
Customer Service.

Cartridge Error
Put the Black (K)
Toner Cartridge

The toner cartridge is not
installed properly.

back in. 1
1

The toner cartridge
color with the problem
is shown in the
message.

Comm.Error

Poor telephone line quality
caused a communication error.

Pull out the drum unit and remove the toner
cartridge for the color that is indicated on the
LCD, then re-install the toner cartridge in the
drum unit. Put the drum unit back into the
machine again.

Send the fax again or connect the machine to
another telephone line. If the problem
continues, call the telephone company and
ask them to check your telephone line.

Error Message

Cause

Action

Condensation

One of the issues that can
cause this error is that
condensation may form inside
the machine after a room
temperature change.

Leave the machine powered on, and fully
open the front cover. Wait 30 minutes, switch
OFF and close the cover, then switch ON. If
this does not clear the error, call Brother
Customer Service.

Connection Fail

You tried to poll a fax machine
that is not in Polled Waiting
mode.

Check the other fax machine’s polling setup.

Cooling Down

The temperature of the drum
unit or toner cartridge is too hot.
The machine will pause its
current print job and go into
cooling down mode. During the
cooling down mode, you will
hear the cooling fan running
while the LCD shows Cooling
Down, and Wait for a
while.

Make sure that you can hear the fan in the
machine spinning and that the exhaust outlet
is not blocked by something.

Cover is Open.

The front cover is not completely
closed.

Close the front cover of the machine.

Cover is Open

The ADF cover is not completely
closed.

Close the ADF cover of the machine.

The ADF is open while loading a
document.

Close the ADF cover of the machine, then
press Stop/Exit.

The fuser cover is not
completely closed or paper was
jammed in the back of the
machine when you turned on
the power.

 Close the fuser cover of the machine.

Wait for a while

Cover is Open

DIMM Error

If the fan is spinning, remove any obstacles
that surround the exhaust outlet, and then
leave the machine turned on but do not use it
for several minutes.
If the fan is not spinning, disconnect the
machine from the power for several minutes,
then reconnect it.

 Make sure paper is not jammed inside the
back of the machine, and then close the
fuser cover and press Black Start or
Color Start.

 The DIMM is not installed
correctly.

 Turn off the machine and remove the
DIMM.

 The DIMM is broken.

 Confirm the DIMM meets the required
specifications. (See Memory board in
Appendix B of the Advanced User's
Guide.)

 The DIMM does not meet
the required specifications.

 Re-install the DIMM correctly. Wait a few
seconds, and then turn it on again.
 If this error message appears again,
replace the DIMM with a new one. (See
Installing extra memory in Appendix B of
the Advanced User's Guide.)
Disconnected

The other person or other
person’s fax machine stopped
the call.

Try to send or receive again.

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Cause

Action

Document Jam

The document was not inserted
or fed properly, or the document
scanned from the ADF was too
long.

See Document jams on page 104 or Using
the automatic document feeder (ADF)
on page 26.

Drum Error

The corona wire on the drum
unit needs to be cleaned.

Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. (See
Cleaning the corona wires on page 70.)

Drum Stop

It is time to replace the drum
unit.

Replace the drum unit. (See Replacing the
drum unit on page 76.)

Duplex Disabled

The back of the machine is not
closed completely.

Close the back cover of the machine.

Although the size of paper in the
paper tray matches the paper
size that was selected from the
control panel or printer driver,
the machine has stopped
printing when it encountered an
additional, different size of
paper in the tray.

Make sure the paper tray contains only the
size of paper you select in either the control
panel or printer driver, then press Black Start
or Color Start.

The paper tray was pulled out
before the machine completed
printing on both sides of the
paper.

Re-install the paper tray and press
Black Start or Color Start.

The temperature of the fuser
unit does not rise to a specified
temperature within the specified
time.

Turn the power switch off, wait a few seconds,
and then turn it on again. Leave the machine
for 15 minutes with the power on.

Close the Back
Cover of the
machine.
Duplex Disabled
Reload paper,
then press Start.

Fuser Error

The fuser unit is too hot.
Jam Duplex

The paper is jammed
underneath Paper Tray 1 or in
the fuser unit.

(See Paper is jammed underneath paper tray
1 on page 114.)

Jam Inside

The paper is jammed inside the
machine.

(See Paper is jammed inside the machine
on page 110.)

Jam MP

The paper is jammed in the MP
tray of the machine.

(See Paper is jammed in the MP tray
on page 106.)

Jam Rear

The paper is jammed in the back
of the machine.

(See Paper is jammed at the back of the
machine on page 108.)

Error Message

Cause

Action

Jam Tray 1

The paper is jammed in the
paper tray of the machine.

(See Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray 2
on page 107.)

Jam Tray 2
Limit Exceeded

The printing limit set by Secure Contact your administrator to check your
Function Lock 2.0 was reached. Secure Function Lock Settings.

Low Temperature

The room temperature is too low
for the machine to operate.

Increase the room temperature to allow the
machine to operate.

No Belt Unit

The belt unit is not installed
properly.

Re-install the belt unit. (See Replacing the
belt unit on page 82.)

No Paper

The machine is out of paper or
paper is not properly loaded in
the paper tray.

Do one of the following:
 Refill the paper in the paper tray.
 Remove the paper and load it again.
 If the problem is not resolved, the paper
pick-up roller may need to be cleaned.
Clean the paper pick-up roller. (See
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers in
Appendix A of the Advanced User's
Guide.)

No Permission

Printing color documents is
restricted by Secure Function
Lock 2.0. The print job will be
canceled.

Contact your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.

No Response/Busy

The number you dialed does not
answer or is busy.

Verify the number and try again.

No Toner

The toner cartridge for the color
indicated on the LCD is not
installed correctly.

Pull out the drum unit. Take out the toner
cartridge for the color indicated on the LCD,
and then put it back into the drum unit.

No Tray

The paper tray indicated on the
LCD is not installed properly.

Re-install the paper tray that is indicated on
the LCD.

No Waste Toner

The waste toner box is not
installed properly.

Re-install the waste toner box. (See
Replacing the waste toner box on page 88.)

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Cause

Action

Out of Memory

The machine’s memory is full.

Fax sending or copy operation in progress
Do one of the following:
 Press Black Start or Color Start to send
or copy the scanned pages.
 Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other
operations in progress finish, and then try
again.
 Clear the faxes from the memory.
Print the faxes that are stored in the
memory to restore the memory to 100%.
Then turn off Fax Storage to avoid storing
more faxes in the memory. (See Printing a
fax from the memory in Chapter 4 of the
Advanced User's Guide and Fax Storage
in Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's
Guide.)
 Add optional memory. (See Memory
board in Appendix B of the Advanced
User's Guide.)

Print operation in process
Do one of the following:
 Reduce the print quality. (See Basic tab in
the Software User's Guide.)
 Clear the faxes from the memory. (See
the above explanation.)
Print Unable XX

The machine has a mechanical
problem.

Do one of the following:
 Turn the power switch off, wait for a few
minutes, and then turn it on again. (See
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal
report on page 103.)
 If the problem continues, call Brother
Customer Service.

Protected Device

The protect switch of the USB
Flash memory drive is on.

Turn off the protect switch of the USB Flash
memory drive.

Error Message

Cause

Action

Registration
failed

Registration failed.

Do one of the following:
 Turn off the machine’s power switch. Wait
a few seconds, then turn it on again.
 Try Manual Registration, MENU, Printer,
Manual Regist.. (See Manual
Registration in Appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
 Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the
belt unit on page 82.)
 If the problem continues, call Brother
Customer Service.
Change the name of the file on the USB Flash
memory drive or the file you are trying to save.

Rename the File

There is already a file on the
USB Flash memory drive with
the same name as the file you
are trying to save.

Replace Parts
Belt Unit

It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit. (See Replacing the belt
unit on page 82.)

Replace Parts
Drum Unit

It is time to replace the drum
unit.

Replace the drum unit.

The drum unit counter was not
reset when a new drum was
installed.

Reset the drum unit counter.

It is time to replace the fuser
unit.

Call Brother Customer Service or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to replace the
fuser unit.

Replace Parts
Fuser Unit

(See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)
(See Resetting the drum counter
on page 82.)

To replace Fuser Unit call Brother Customer
Service at:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada)
or to locate a Brother Authorized Service
Center, visit us at:
http://www.brother-usa.com/service/

100

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Cause

Action

Replace Parts

It is time to replace the paper
feeding kit.

Call Brother Customer Service or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to replace the
PF Kit.

PF Kit 1
PF Kit 2

To replace PF Kit call Brother Customer
Service at:

PF Kit MP

1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada)
or to locate a Brother Authorized Service
Center, visit us at:
http://www.brother-usa.com/service/
Replace Parts
WT Box End Soon

The waste toner box is near the
end of its life.

Buy a new waste toner box before you get a
Replace WT Box message.

Replace Toner X

The toner cartridge is at the end
of its life.

Replace the toner cartridge for the color
indicated on the LCD. (See Replacing a
Toner cartridge on page 64.)

Replace WT Box

It is time to replace the waste
toner box.

Replace the waste toner box. (See Replacing
the waste toner box on page 88.)

Scan Unable XX

The machine has a mechanical
problem.

 Turn off the power switch and then turn it
on again. (See Transferring your faxes or
Fax Journal report on page 103.)
 If the problem continues, call Brother
Customer Service.

Document is too long for duplex
scanning.

Press Stop/Exit. Use the suitable size of
paper for duplex scanning. (See Document
Size on page 175.)

Short paper

The length of the paper in the
tray is too short for the machine
to deliver it to the Face down
output tray.

Open the back cover (face-up output tray) to
let the printed paper out on the face up output
tray. Remove the printed pages and then
press Black Start or Color Start.

Size Error DX

The paper size defined in the
printer driver is not usable for
the automatic duplex printing.

Press Black Start or Color Start. Choose a
paper size which is supported by the duplex
tray. (See Print media on page 176.)

Size mismatch

The paper in the tray is not the
correct size.

Load the correct size of paper in the tray and
set the “Paper Size” (MENU, General
Setup, Tray Setting).
(See Paper Size and Type on page 18.)

Small paper

The paper size specified in the
printer driver is too small for the
machine to deliver it to the Face
down output tray.

Open the back cover (face-up output tray) to
let the printed paper out on the face up output
tray and then press Black Start or
Color Start.

Toner Error

One or more toner cartridges
are not installed correctly.

Pull out the drum unit. Take out all the toner
cartridges, and then put them back into the
drum unit.

101

Error Message

Cause

Action

Toner Low

The toner cartridge is near the
end of its life.

Buy a new toner cartridge for the color that is
indicated on the LCD before you get a
Replace Toner message.

Too Many Files

There are too many files stored Reduce the number of files stored on the USB
on the USB Flash memory drive. Flash memory drive.

Unusable Device

An incompatible or defective
device has been connected to
the USB direct interface.

102

Remove the USB Flash memory drive from
the USB direct interface.

Troubleshooting

Transferring your faxes or Fax
Journal report

Transferring faxes to your PC
B

If the LCD shows:
 Print Unable XX

You can transfer the faxes from your
machine’s memory to your PC.

Make sure that you have installed
MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then
turn on PC-Fax Receiving on the PC.
(For details about PC-Fax Receive, see
PC-FAX receiving in the Software
User's Guide.)

Make sure that you have set
PC Fax Receive on the machine.
(See PC-Fax Receive in Chapter 4 of
the Advanced User's Guide.)
If faxes are in the machine’s memory
when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the
faxes to your PC.

Do one of the following:

 Scan Unable XX
We recommend transferring your faxes to
another fax machine or to your PC. (See
Transferring faxes to another fax machine
on page 103 or Transferring faxes to your PC
on page 103.)
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report
to see if there are any faxes you need to
transfer. (See Transferring the Fax Journal
report to another fax machine on page 103.)

Note
If there is an error message on the
machine’s LCD after the faxes have been
transferred, disconnect the machine from
the power source for several minutes, and
then reconnect it.

Transferring faxes to another fax
machine
If you have not set up your Station ID, you
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your
Station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)

a
b
c
d
e

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Service.
Press Service.
Press Data Transfer.
Press Fax Transfer.
Do one of the following:
 If the LCD shows No Data, there
are no faxes left in the machine’s
memory. Press Stop/Exit.
 Enter the fax number to which faxes
will be forwarded.

 To transfer all faxes to your PC,
press Yes. You will be asked if you
want a backup print.
 To exit and leave the faxes in the
memory, press No.
B

Press Stop/Exit.

Transferring the Fax Journal report to
another fax machine

If you have not set up your Station ID, you
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your
station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)

a
b

Press MENU.

c
d
e

Press Data Transfer.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Press a or b to display Service.
Press Service.

Press Report Trans..
Enter the fax number to which the Fax
Journal report will be forwarded.

Press Black Start or Color Start.
103

Document jams
Document is jammed in the
top of the ADF unit

Take out any paper from the ADF that is
not jammed.

b
c

Open the ADF cover.

d
e

Close the ADF cover.

104

Document is jammed under
the document cover

Take out any paper from the ADF that is
not jammed.

b
c

Lift the document cover.

d
e

Close the document cover.

Pull the jammed document out to the
right.

Pull the jammed document out to the
left.

Press Stop/Exit.

Troubleshooting

Removing small documents
jammed in the ADF

a
b

c
d

Document is jammed at the
output tray

Lift the document cover.

Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as
cardstock, into the ADF to push any
small paper scraps through.

Take out any paper from the ADF that is
not jammed.

Pull the jammed document out to the
right.

Press Stop/Exit.

Close the document cover.
Press Stop/Exit.

105

Paper jams
Paper is jammed in the
MP tray

d
B

When loading paper in the MP tray,
make sure that the paper stays under
the maximum paper mark (1) on both
sides of the tray.

If the LCD shows Jam MP, follow these steps:

a
b

Remove the paper from the MP tray.
Remove any jammed paper from in and
around the MP tray.
1

106

Fan the paper stack, and then put it back
in the MP tray.

Press Black Start or Color Start to
resume printing.

Troubleshooting

Paper is jammed in paper tray 1
or tray 2
If the LCD shows Jam Tray 1 or
Jam Tray 2, follow these steps:

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.
For Jam Tray 1:

For Jam Tray 2:

WARNING
B

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in
the illustration. These rollers may be
rotating at high speed and can pinch or
entrap your hand.

Use both hands to slowly pull out the
jammed paper.

107

IMPORTANT
If the paper cannot easily be removed in
this direction, stop and follow the
instructions for Paper is jammed inside the
machine on page 110.

Paper is jammed at the back
of the machine
If the LCD shows Jam Rear, a paper jam
occurred behind the back cover. Follow these
steps:

Leave the machine turned on for 10
minutes to cool down.

Open the back cover.

Note
Pulling out the jammed paper downwards
allows you to remove the paper easier.

Make sure the paper is below the
maximum paper mark (b b b) (1) of the
paper tray. While pressing the green
paper-guide release lever, slide the
paper guides to fit the paper size. Make
sure that the guides are firmly in the
slots. (See Loading paper in the
standard paper tray on page 10.)
1

108

Put the paper tray firmly back in the
machine.

Troubleshooting

WARNING
HOT SURFACE

Pull the green tabs (2) at the left and
right hand sides toward you and fold
down the fuser cover (1).

After you have just used the machine, some
internal parts of the machine will be
extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool
down before you touch the internal parts of
the machine.

2
1

Note
If the envelope levers (3) inside the back
cover are pulled down to the envelope
position, lift these levers to the original
position before pulling the green tabs (2)
down.

Using both hands, gently pull the
jammed paper out of the fuser unit.

109

Close the fuser cover (1).

Paper is jammed inside the
machine
If the LCD shows Jam Inside, follow these
steps:

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Note
If you are printing on envelopes, pull down
the envelope levers (2) to the envelope
position again before closing the back
cover.

110

Fully close the back cover.

Troubleshooting

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

111

IMPORTANT

Pull out the jammed paper slowly.

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in
the release position as shown in the
illustration.

• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and the toner cartridges on a clean,
flat surface with a sheet of disposable
paper or cloth underneath it in case you
accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit
when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides
of the drum unit.

112

Troubleshooting

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum
unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of
the machine, then gently slide the drum
unit into the machine until it stops at the
green lock lever.

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Close the front cover of the machine.

1
2

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise
to the lock position.

Note

If you turn off the machine while the LCD
shows Jam Inside, the machine will
print incomplete data from your computer.
Before you turn on the machine, delete the
print spool job on your computer.

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect
all cables and the telephone line cord.
Turn on the machine’s power switch.

113

Paper is jammed underneath
paper tray 1
If the LCD shows Jam Duplex, follow these
steps:

Leave the machine turned on for 10
minutes to cool down.

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.

WARNING
B

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in
the illustration. These rollers may be
rotating at high speed and can pinch or
entrap your hand.

If paper is not caught inside the
machine, turn the paper tray over and
check underneath the paper tray.

Note
DO NOT put the paper tray back in at this
point.

114

Troubleshooting

If the paper is not caught in the paper
tray, open the back cover.

WARNING
HOT SURFACE
After you have just used the machine, some
internal parts of the machine will be
extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool
down before you touch the internal parts of
the machine.

115

Push down and pull the green tabs at
the left and right hand sides toward you
and fold down the fuser cover (1).

Close the fuser cover (1).

1
1

h
i
f

116

Using both hands, gently pull out the
jammed paper.

Fully close the back cover.
Put the paper tray firmly back in the
machine.

Troubleshooting

If you are having difficulty with your machine

IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be
made from within that country.

If you think there is a problem, check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips. You can
solve most problems by yourself.
If you need additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and
troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

Printing or printing received faxes
Difficulties
 Condensed print
 Horizontal streaks

Suggestions
Usually this is caused by a poor telephone connection. If your copy looks good,
you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone
line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.

 Top and bottom sentences are
cut off
 Missing lines
Poor print quality

See Improving the print quality on page 127.

Vertical black lines when receiving

The corona wires for printing may be dirty. Clean the corona wires on the drum
unit. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 70.)
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.
If the problem continues, call Brother Customer Service at 1-877-BROTHER
(1-877-276-8437) (in USA) or 1-877-BROTHER (in Canada).

Received faxes appear as split or
blank pages.

If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra
blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using.
(See Paper Size and Type on page 18.)
Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax in Chapter 4 of the
Advanced User's Guide.)

Telephone line or connections
Difficulties

Suggestions

Dialing does not work.

Check for a dial tone.
Change Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.) (Canada only)
Check all line cord connections.
Check that the machine is plugged in and switched on.
Send a manual fax by pressing Hook or by lifting the handset of the external
telephone and dialing the number. Wait to hear fax receiving tones before
pressing Black Start or Color Start.

117

Telephone line or connections (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

The machine does not answer
when called.

Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup. (See
Receive Mode settings on page 35.) Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your
machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord
connection. If you do not hear ringing when you call your machine, ask your
telephone company to check the line.

Receiving Faxes
Difficulties

Suggestions

Cannot receive a fax.

Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook key. If you hear
static or interference on your fax line, please contact your local telephone
company.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL
or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the
external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as
the Brother machine. (See Receive Mode settings on page 35.)
If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically
answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.
If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you
should select the External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother
machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to
leave a message on your answering machine.
If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subscriber service,
please see Voice Mail on page 37.
If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service,
please see Distinctive Ring on page 38.
If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to
automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In
Fax/Tel mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and
produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.
If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming
faxes, you should select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer
every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.

118

Troubleshooting

Receiving Faxes (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

Cannot receive a fax.

Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your
Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the ring delay setting:

(continued)

 If the answer mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the ring delay to
1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 35.)
 If the answer mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings
programmed on your answering machine to 2.
 If the answer mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the ring delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
 If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.
Remember to reset your ring delay or answering machine setting back to your
original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the ring delay, then
a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the
machine has a chance to answer.
 If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber
service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem
with your fax line.
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the
same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up
correctly. (See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)
on page 40.)
1

Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your
Brother machine’s LINE jack.

Remove the protective cap from your Brother machine’s EXT jack, and then
plug the telephone line cord from your answering machine into the EXT jack.

Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.
If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your
answering machine to answer within 2 or 3 rings.

Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
 Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing
message.
 Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
 End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people
sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or
press l51 and Start to send a fax.”

Set your answering machine to answer calls.

Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Receive
Mode settings on page 35.)

Make sure your Brother machine's Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy
Receive is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered
the call on an external or extension telephone. (See Easy Receive on page 36.)
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See
Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 126.)
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

119

Sending faxes
Difficulties

Suggestions

Poor sending quality.

Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your
machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.
(See Cleaning the scanner in Appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide.)

Transmission Verification Report
says RESULT:NG.

There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.
If you are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:NG on the Transmission
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra
memory, you can turn off fax storage (see Changing Remote Fax Options in
Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's Guide), print fax messages in memory (see
Printing a fax from the memory in Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's Guide) or
cancel a delayed fax or polling job (see Checking and canceling waiting jobs in
Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's Guide). If the problem continues, ask the
telephone company to check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See
Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 126.)

Sent faxes are blank.

Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents
on page 26.)

Vertical black lines when sending.

Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid
on the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner in Appendix A of the Advanced
User's Guide.)

Cannot send a fax.

Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

Handling incoming calls
Difficulties

Suggestions

The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a
CNG Tone.

If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may
mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling
and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive to Off. (See Easy
Receive on page 36.)

Sending a Fax Call to the machine.

If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Fax Receive
Code (default setting is l51). When your machine answers, hang up.

Custom features on a single line.

If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Caller ID, RingMaster, Voice Mail,
an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single
telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving
faxes.
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and
its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax,
the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM feature
should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone
system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information
on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is
crucial to your business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.

Copy difficulties
Difficulties
Cannot make a copy.

Suggestions
 Make sure that COPY

is illuminated. (See How to copy on page 53.)

 Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

120

Troubleshooting

Copy difficulties (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

Vertical black line appears in
copies.

Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the
glass strip, or the corona wire is dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner in Appendix A of
the Advanced User's Guide and Cleaning the corona wires on page 70.)

Copies are blank.

Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Using the automatic
document feeder (ADF) on page 26 or Using the scanner glass on page 27.)

Printing difficulties
Difficulties
No printout.

Suggestions
 Check that the machine is plugged in and the power switch is turned on.
 Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed properly. (See
Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)
 Check the interface cable connection on both the machine and your computer.
(See the Quick Setup Guide.)
 Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.
 Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and
maintenance messages on page 95.)
 Check that the machine is online:
(Windows® 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2) Click the Start button and
Devices and Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure
that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
(Windows Vista®) Click the Start button, Control Panel, Hardware and
Sound, and then Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make
sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
(Windows® XP and Windows Server ® 2003/2008) Click the Start button and
choose Printers and Faxes. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make
sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
(Windows® 2000) Click the Start button and choose Settings and then
Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use
Printer Offline is unchecked.
 Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.
 If either the Cyan, Magenta or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while
printing a color document, the print job cannot be completed. You can choose
to start the print job again in Mono mode, as long as black toner is available.
See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.

The machine prints unexpectedly
or it prints garbage.

 Press Job Cancel to cancel print jobs.

The machine prints the first couple
of pages correctly, then some
pages have text missing.

 Check the settings in your application to make sure that it is set up to work with
your machine.

The headers or footers appear
when the document displays on the
screen but they do not show up
when it is printed.

There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and
bottom margins in your document to allow for this. (See Unscannable and
unprintable areas on page 17.)

 Check the settings in your application to make sure it is set up to work with
your machine.

 Your computer is not recognizing the machine’s input buffer’s full signal. Make
sure that you connected the interface cable correctly. (See the Quick Setup
Guide.)

121

Printing difficulties (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

The machine does not print on both
sides of the paper even though the
printer driver setting is Duplex.

Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You need to choose Letter, Legal

The machine is not printing or has
stopped printing.

 If either the Cyan, Magenta or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while
printing a color document, the print job cannot be completed. You can choose
to start the print job again in Mono mode, as long as black toner is available.
See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.

or Folio [16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)].

 Press Job Cancel.
As the machine cancels the print job and clears it from the memory it may
produce an incomplete printout.
The machine does not change to
Direct Print mode when a USB
flash memory drive is connected to
the USB direct interface.

When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the machine does not wake up when
a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface. Press the LCD
surface or any key to wake up the machine. Then press Direct Print on the
LCD to display the Direct Print menu.

Scanning difficulties
Difficulties

Suggestions

TWAIN errors appear while
scanning.

Make sure that the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source. In
PaperPort™ 12SE, click File, Scan or Get Photo and choose the Brother TWAIN
driver.

OCR does not work.

Try increasing the scanning resolution.
(Macintosh users)
Make sure you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg

Network scanning does not work.

See Network difficulties on page 124.

Cannot scan.

Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

Software difficulties
Difficulties

Suggestions

Cannot install software or print.

Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair
and reinstall the software.

Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ or ‘4 in 1’
printing.

Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the
same.

The machine does not print from

Try to reduce the print quality. (See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)

Adobe® Illustrator®.

122

Troubleshooting

Paper handling difficulties
Difficulties

Suggestions

The machine does not feed paper.

 If there is no paper, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray.

The LCD shows No Paper or a
Paper Jam message.

 If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled,
you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the
stack over and put it back into the paper tray.
 Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.
 Make sure that manual feed mode is not chosen in the printer driver.
 Clean the paper pick-up roller. See Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers in
Appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide.
 If the LCD shows the Paper Jam message and you still have a problem, see
Error and maintenance messages on page 95.

The machine does not feed paper
from the MP tray.

 Make sure that MP tray is chosen in the printer driver.
 Fan the paper well and put it back in the tray firmly.

How do I print on envelopes?

You can load envelopes in the MP tray. Your application must be set up to print
the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or
Document Setup menu of your application. (See your application’s manual for
more information.)

What paper can I use?

You can use thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper,
glossy paper, envelopes and labels that are made for laser machines. (For details,
see Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21.)

There is a paper jam.

Clear the jammed paper. (See Error and maintenance messages on page 95.)

Print quality difficulties
Difficulties
Printed pages are curled.

Suggestions
 Low quality thin or thick paper or not printing on the recommended side of the
paper could cause this problem. Try turning over the stack of paper in the
paper tray.
 Make sure that you choose the Paper Type that suits the print media type you
are using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21.)

Printed pages are smeared.

Printouts are too light.

The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you are using,
or the print media may be too thick or have a rough surface. (See Acceptable
paper and other print media on page 21 and Basic tab in the Software User's
Guide.)
 If this problem occurs when making copies or printing received faxes, turn
Toner Save mode to Off in the machine menu settings. (See Toner Save in
Chapter 1 of the Advanced User's Guide)
 Remove the check in the Toner Save Mode check box in the Advanced tab
of the printer driver. (See Advanced tab in the Software User's Guide.)
 In the Basic tab of the printer driver, click the Settings button and check the
Enhance Black Printing check box.

123

Network difficulties
Difficulties

Suggestions

Cannot print over a wired Network.

If you are having Network problems see the Network User's Guide for more
information.
Make sure your machine is powered on and is on-line and in Ready mode. Print
the Network Configuration report to see your current Network settings. (See
Reports in Chapter 6 of the Advanced User's Guide.) Reconnect the LAN cable to
the hub to verify that the cable and network connections are good. If possible, try
connecting the machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. You
can check the current wired network status from the Network control panel menu.

The network scanning feature
does not work.

(Windows®)
It is necessary to set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow Network
scanning. To add port 54925 for Network scanning, enter the information below:
 In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother NetScan.
 In Port number: Enter 54925.
 In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at
http://solutions.brother.com/.
(Macintosh)
 The network scanning feature may not work due to the firewall settings.
Change or disable the firewall settings. If you are using a third-party personal
Firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the
software manufacturer.
 Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from
the model list in ControlCenter2.

The network PC-Fax Receive
feature does not work.

(Windows® only)
It is necessary to set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX
Rx. To add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, enter the information below:
 In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
 In Port number: Enter 54926.
 In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at
http://solutions.brother.com/.

124

Troubleshooting

Network difficulties (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

Your computer cannot find your
machine.

(Windows®) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary
network connection. (For details, see the instructions above.)
(Macintosh)
 The computer may be unable to detect the machine due to the firewall settings.
Change or disable the firewall settings. If you are using a third-party personal
Firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the
software manufacturer.
 Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from
the Model pop-up menu of ControlCenter2.

Cannot connect to wireless
network.

Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report. Press MENU, Print Reports,
WLAN Report. and then press Black Start or Color Start. For more details, see
the Quick Setup Guide.

Other
Difficulties

Suggestions

The machine will not turn on.

Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as lightning or a power surge)
may have triggered the machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Turn the machine
off and unplug the power cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord
and turn the machine on.
If the problem is not solved, turn off the machine. Plug the power cord into a
different known working outlet and turn on the machine.

125

Setting Dial Tone detection
Setting the Dial Tone to Detection will
shorten the Dial Tone detect pause.

a
b
c
d
e

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.
Press a or b to display Dial Tone.
Press Dial Tone.

Telephone line interference /
VoIP
If you are having difficulty sending or
receiving a fax due to possible interference
on the telephone line, we recommend that
you adjust the Equalization for compatibility
to reduce the modem speed for fax
operations.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
Press Miscellaneous.

d
e

Press Compatibility.

Press Detection or No Detection.
Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Basic(for VoIP), Normal or
High.
 Basic(for VoIP) reduces the
modem speed to 9600 bps and turns
the error correction mode (ECM) off.
For a standard telephone line: If you
regularly experience interference on
your standard telephone line try this
setting.
If you are using VoIP: VoIP service
providers offer fax support using
various standards. If you regularly
experience fax transmission errors
try this setting.
 Normal sets the modem speed at
14400 bps.
 High sets the modem speed at
33600 bps.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
When you change the Compatibility to
Basic(for VoIP), the ECM feature is
only available for color fax sending.

126

Troubleshooting

Improving the print quality

If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first (MENU, Printer, Print Options,
Test Print). If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not the machine. Check the
interface cable connections or try printing a different document. If the printout or test page printed
from the machine has a quality problem, check the following steps first. And then, if you still have
a print quality problem, check the chart below and follow the recommendations.

Note
Using non-Brother supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine
reliability.

To get the best print quality, we suggest using the recommended paper. Check that you use
paper that meets our specifications. (See Acceptable paper and other print media
on page 21.)

Check that the drum unit and toner cartridges are installed properly.

Examples of poor print
quality
White lines, bands or ribbing
across the page

Recommendation
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Colors are light or unclear on
the whole page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine
or the printer driver.
 Make sure that you choose the proper media type in the printer driver
or in the machine's Paper Type menu setting. (See Acceptable paper
and other print media on page 21 and Basic tab in the Software
User's Guide.)
 Shake all four toner cartridges gently.
 Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry lint-free soft cloth. (See
Cleaning the laser scanner windows in Appendix A of the Advanced
User's Guide.)
 Perform the calibration. (See Calibration in Appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)

127

Examples of poor print
quality
White streaks or bands down
the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Recommendation
 Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the
scanner in Appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide.)
 Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry lint-free soft cloth. (See
Cleaning the laser scanner windows in Appendix A of the Advanced
User's Guide.)
 Clean the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit in Appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)

Colored streaks or bands down
the page

 Identify the missing color and put in a new toner cartridge. (See
Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 64.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

 Clean all four corona wires (one for each color) inside the drum unit
by sliding the green tab. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 70.)
 Make sure the corona wire green tabs are at their home positions (a).

 Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the
scanner in Appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide.)
 Replace the toner cartridge that matches the color of the streak or
band. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 64.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

Colored lines across the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 If colored lines appear at 1.2 in. (30 mm) intervals, replace the toner
cartridge that matches the color of the line. (See Replacing a Toner
cartridge on page 64.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 If colored lines appear at 3.7 in. (94 mm) intervals, put in a new drum
unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

White spots or hollow print
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the
machine's Paper Type menu match the type of paper you are using.
(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and Basic
tab in the Software User's Guide.)
 Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity
can cause white spots or hollow print. (See Choosing a location in the
Safety and Legal Booklet.)
 Clean the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit in Appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)

128

Troubleshooting

Examples of poor print
quality
Completely blank or some
colors are missing
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Recommendation
 Put in a new toner cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge
on page 64.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

Colored spots at 3.7 in.
(94 mm)

3.7 in.
(94 mm)

 If the problem is not solved after printing, the drum may have foreign
material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean
the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit in Appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

3.7 in.
(94 mm)

Colored spots at 1.2 in.
(30 mm)

1.2 in.
(30 mm)

 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 64.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

1.2 in.
(30 mm)

Toner scatter or toner stain
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Check the machine's environment. Conditions such as high humidity
and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See
Choosing a location in the Safety and Legal Booklet.)
 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 64.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 If the problem continues, put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the
drum unit on page 76.)

129

Examples of poor print
quality
The color of your printouts is
not what you expected

Recommendation
 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine
or the printer driver.
 Perform the calibration. (See Calibration in Appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
 Adjust the color by using the custom setting in the printer driver and
by using the control panel of the machine. Colors the machine can
print and colors you see on a monitor are different. The machine may
not be able to reproduce the colors on your monitor.
 If colors appear in the printed gray areas, make sure there is a check
in the Improve Gray Color check box of the printer driver. (See Basic
tab for Windows® printer driver, Advanced options for Windows® BRScript printer driver, Print Settings for Macintosh printer driver or
Printer Features for Macintosh BR-Script printer driver in the
Software User's Guide.)
 If shaded areas look dull, remove the check from the Improve Gray
Color check box.
 If a printed black graphic is too light, choose Enhance Black Printing
mode in the printer driver. (See Settings Dialog for Windows® printer
driver, Advanced options for Windows® BR-Script printer driver, Print
Settings for Macintosh printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh
BR-Script printer driver in the Software User's Guide.)
 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 64.)
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

All one color

 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

Color misregistration

 Make sure that the machine is on a solid level surface.

 Perform the auto color registration using the control panel (see Auto
Registration in Appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide) or perform
the manual color registration using the control panel (see Manual
Registration in Appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide).
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)
 Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the belt unit on page 82.)

130

Troubleshooting

Examples of poor print
quality
Uneven density appears
periodically across the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Recommendation
 Perform the calibration. (See Calibration in Appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
 Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the
scanner in Appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide.)
 Identify the color that is uneven and put in a new toner cartridge for
that color. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 64.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

Thin lines do not print

 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine
or the printer driver.
 Change the print resolution.
 If you use a Windows® printer driver, choose Improve Pattern
Printing or Improve Thin Line in Settings in the Basic tab. (See
Settings Dialog in the Software User's Guide.)

Wrinkle

 Change to the recommended type of paper. (See Recommended
paper and print media on page 21.)
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Make sure that the back cover is closed properly.
 Make sure that the two gray levers inside the back cover are in the up
position. When you are using thick paper or envelopes, make sure
the gray levers are in the down position to prevent wrinkling.
 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the
machine’s Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)

Offset image

 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the
machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)
 Make sure that the two gray levers inside the back cover are in the up
position.

 Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as low humidity
and low temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See
Choosing a location in the Safety and Legal Booklet.)
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 76.)

131

Examples of poor print
quality
Poor fixing

Recommendation
 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the
machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)
 Make sure that the two gray levers inside the back cover are in the up
position.
 Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver. (See Other
Print Options (For Windows® printer driver), Advanced options (For
Windows® BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh
printer driver) or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer
driver) in the Software User's Guide.)
If this selection does not provide enough improvement, change the
printer driver setting in Media Type to a thick setting.

Curled or wavy

 Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver when you do
not use our recommended paper. (See Other Print Options (For
Windows® printer driver), Advanced options (For Windows®
BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh printer driver)
or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer driver) in the
Software User's Guide.)
 If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the
paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray.
Also, fan the paper stack and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper
tray.
 Store the paper where it will not be exposed to avoid high
temperatures and high humidity.
 Open the back cover (face up output tray) to let the printed paper out
on the face up output tray.

132

Troubleshooting

Examples of poor print
quality

 Make sure that the two gray envelope levers are pulled down when
you are printing envelopes.

EFGHIJKLMN

ABCDEFG

Envelope creases

Recommendation

 If creases occur with the envelope levers in the envelope position,
print with the back cover opened and feed one envelope at a time
from the MP tray.

133

Machine Information
Checking the Serial Number
You can see the machine’s Serial Number on
the LCD.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Machine Info..
Press Machine Info..

The machine will display the machine’s
Serial Number on the LCD.

Press Stop/Exit.

Reset functions
The following reset functions are available:

1 Network
You can reset the internal print server
back to its default factory settings such as
the password and IP address information.
2 Address & Fax
Address & Fax resets the following
settings:
 Address Book
(One Touch Dial/Speed Dial/Setup
Groups)
 Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Polled TX, Delayed Fax)
 Station ID
(name and number)
 Coverpage Msg
(comments)
 Remote Fax Options
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage,
Fax Forwarding, Paging, PC-Fax
Send, and PC-Fax Receive
(Windows® only))
 Report settings
(Transmission Verification Report/
Tel Index List/Fax Journal)
 Setting Lock password
3 All Settings
You can reset all the machine settings
back to the settings that were set at the
factory.
Brother strongly recommends you
perform this operation when you dispose
of the machine.

Note
Unplug the interface cable before you
choose Network or All Settings.

134

Troubleshooting

How to reset the machine

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.

Press a or b to display Reset.
Press Reset.

Press Network, Address & Fax or
All settings to choose the reset
function you want to use.

Do one of the following;
 To reset the settings, press Yes and
go to step f.
 To exit without making changes,
press No and go to step g.

You will be asked to reset the machine.
Do one of the following;
 To reset the machine press Yes for 2
seconds. The machine will begin the
reset.
 To exit without resetting the
machine, press No. Go to step g.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
You can also reset the Network settings
by pressing MENU, Network,
Network Reset.

135

Menu and features

On-screen
programming

Your machine is designed to be easy to
operate with LCD on-screen programming
using the menu buttons on the Touchscreen.
User-friendly programming helps you take full
advantage of all the menu selections your
machine has to offer.

You can program your machine by using the
Menu table that begins on page 137. These
pages list the menu selections and options.

136

MENU button and
mode keys
Access the main menu.
MENU

Access each mode and its
menu of temporary settings.

Since your programming is done on the LCD,
we have created step-by-step on-screen
instructions to help you program your
machine. All you need to do is follow the
instructions as they guide you through the
menu selections and programming options.

Menu table

Exit the menu or stop the
current operation.

Menu and features

Menu table

The menu table will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the
machine's programs. The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

MENU
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

General Setup

Mode Timer

—

0 Sec

Sets the time to
return to Fax mode
and the time the
machine will change
from a restricted user
to Public user mode
when using Secure
Function Lock.

See 1.

Sets the size and
type of paper in paper
MP tray.

30 Secs
1 Min
2 Mins*
5 Mins
Off
Tray Setting

MP Tray

—

Paper Size
A4
Letter*
Legal
Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio
Any
Paper Type
Thin
Plain*
Thick
Thicker
Recycled Paper

Glossy
1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

137

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

General Setup

Tray Setting

Tray#1

—

Paper Size

(Continued)

Sets the size and
type of paper in paper
tray #1.

Sets the size and
type of paper in paper
tray #2.

Page

Letter*
Legal
Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio
Paper Type
Thin
Plain*
Thick
Thicker
Recycled Paper
Tray#2
(This menu
only appears if
you have the
optional
tray#2.)

—

Paper Size
A4
Letter*
Legal
Executive
A5
B5
B6
Folio
Paper Type
Thin
Plain*
Thick
Thicker
Recycled Paper

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

138

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

General Setup

Tray Setting

Tray Use:Copy

—

Tray#1 Only

(Continued)

Chooses the tray that
will be used for Copy
mode.

Chooses the tray that
will be used for Fax
mode.

Chooses the tray that
will be used for Print
mode.

Tray#2 Only

Page

MP Only
MP>T1>T2*
T1>T2>MP
(Tray#2 or T2
appears only if
you installed the
optional paper
tray.)
Tray Use:Fax

—

Tray#1 Only
Tray#2 Only
MP Only
MP>T1>T2
T1>T2>MP*
(Tray#2 or T2
appears only if
you installed the
optional paper
tray.)

Tray Use:Print

—

Tray#1 Only
Tray#2 Only
MP Only
MP>T1>T2*
T1>T2>MP
(Tray#2 or T2
appears only if
you installed the
optional paper
tray.)

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

139

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

General Setup

Volume

Ring

—

Off

Adjusts the ring
volume.

See 1.

(Continued)

Low
Med*
High
Beeper

—

Off
Low

Adjusts the beeper
volume.

Med*
High
Speaker

—

Off
Low

Adjusts the speaker
volume.

Med*
High
Ecology

Toner Save

—

On
Off*

Sleep Time

—

Range varies
depending on
models.

Backlight

—

Light*

Increases the page
yield of the toner
cartridge.
Conserves power.

3 Mins*
LCD Settings

Med

You can adjust the
brightness of the
LCD backlight.

Dark
Dim Timer

—

Off*
10 Secs
20 Secs

You can set how long
the LCD backlight
stays on after the last
key press.

30 Secs
Security

Function Lock

Set Password

—

You can restrict
selected machine
operations for up to
25 restricted users
and for all other nonauthorized Public
users.

—

Stops unauthorized
users from changing
the machine’s current
settings.

Lock OffiOn
Setup ID

Setting Lock

Set Password
Lock OffiOn

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

140

Menu and features

MENU
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Fax

Setup Receive

Ring Delay

—

Sets the number of
rings before the
machine answers in
Fax Only or Fax/Tel
mode.

Sets the length of the
pseudo/double-ring
time in Fax/Tel mode.

Receives fax
messages
automatically when
you answer a call and
hear fax tones.

Allows you to answer
all calls at an
extension telephone
and use codes to turn
the machine on or off.
You can personalize
these codes.

Reduces the size of
incoming faxes.

See 1.

(In Fax mode
only)

1
2
3

Page

4*
F/T Ring Time

—

20 Secs*
30 Secs
40 Secs
70 Secs

Easy Receive —

On*
Off

Remote Codes

—

On* (l51, #51)
Off

Auto Reduction

—

Forward/Page/Store

—

On*
Off
Off*
Fax Forward
Paging
Fax Storage
PC Fax Receive

(Backup Print)

—

Sets the machine to
forward fax
messages, to call
your pager or cell
phone, to store
incoming faxes in the
memory (so you can
retrieve them while
you are away from
your machine), or to
send faxes to your
PC.

If you choose
Fax Forward or
PC-Fax Receive, you
can turn on the safety
feature Backup Print.

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

141

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Fax

Setup Receive

Print Density

—

-2

See 1.

(Continued)

(In Fax mode
only)

Makes printouts
darker or lighter.

-1
0*

(Continued)

+1
+2
Fax Rx Stamp

—

On
Off*

Duplex

—

On
Off*

Setup Send

Batch TX

—

On
Off*

Coverpage
Setting

Report Setting

Transmission

Prints the received
time and date on the
top of the received
faxes.
Prints receive faxes
on both sides of the
paper.
Combines delayed
faxes going to the
same fax number at
the same time of day
into one
transmission.

Print Sample

—

You can print a
sample of the fax
cover page.

Coverpage
Message

—

Set up your own
comments for the fax
cover page.

—

Choose the initial
setup for the
Transmission
Verification Report.

Sets the interval for
automatic printing of
the Fax Journal.

See 1.

On+Image
Off*
Off+Image
Journal Period

—

Off
Every 50 Faxes*
Every 6 Hours
Every 12 Hours
Every 24 Hours
Every 2 Days
Every 7 Days

Print Fax

—

Prints incoming faxes
stored in the
memory.

Remote Access

—

---l

Set your own code for
Remote Retrieval.

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

142

If you have chosen
other than Off and
Every 50 Faxes,
you can set the time
for the chosen option.
If you have chosen
Every 7 Days, you
can also set the day
of the week.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Fax

Dial Restrict.

Dial Pad

—

Off*

You can set the
machine to restrict
dialing when using
the dial pad.

See 1.

(Continued)

Enter # twice
On
One Touch Dial

—

Off*
Enter # twice
On

Speed Dial

—

Off*
Enter # twice
On

LDAP Server

—

Off*
Enter # twice
On

You can set the
machine to restrict
the dialing of
One Touch numbers.
You can set the
machine to restrict
the dialing of Speed
Dial numbers.
You can set the
machine to restrict
the dialing of LDAP
server numbers.

Remaining Jobs

—

Check which
scheduled jobs are in
the memory and
cancel chosen jobs.

Miscellaneous

Compatibility

—

High*

Adjusts the
equalization for
transmission
difficulties.

Normal
Basic(for VoIP)

126

VoIP service
providers offer fax
support using various
standards. If you
regularly experience
fax transmission
errors, choose
Basic(for VoIP).
Distinctive

—

Distinctive Ring
setting
Off*
Set (On)

—

Uses the telephone
company’s
Distinctive Ring
subscriber service to
register the ring
pattern with the
machine.

Ring Pattern
1

2
3
4
1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

143

MENU
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Printer

Emulation

—

Auto*

Choose the
emulation mode.

See 2.

HP LaserJet
BR-Script 3
Print Options

Internal Font

—

HP LaserJet
BR-Script 3

Duplex

Configuration

—

Test Print

—

Prints a test page.

—

Off*

Enables or disables
duplex printing. You
can also choose long
edge or short edge
duplex printing.

Long Edge
Short Edge
Output Color

—

Auto*
Color
B&W

Reset Printer

—

Yes
No

Calibration

Prints a list of the
machine’s internal
fonts.

Calibrate

—

Reset

—

Yes

—

Yes

Yes
No

Prints a list of the
machine’s printer
settings.

Chooses color or
black & white printed
documents. If you
choose Auto, the
machine selects a
suitable option for the
document (color or
B&W).
Restores the printer
settings to the
original factory
default settings.
Adjusts the color
density or returns the
color calibration to
the factory settings.

No
Auto Regist.

No
1

See Advanced User's Guide

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

144

Adjusts the print
position of each color
automatically.

See 1.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Printer

Manual Regist.

Print Chart

—

Print the chart to
manually check the
registration of the
colors.

See 1.

Set Regist.

1 Magenta Left

—

Sets the correction
value on the chart
you printed from
Print Chart.

Normal*

Sets the interval time
you want to carry out
the auto registration
and the calibration.

(Continued)

2 Cyan Left
3 Yellow Left
4 Magenta Center
5 Cyan Center
6 Yellow Center
7 Magenta Right
8 Cyan Right
9 Yellow Right
Frequency

—

Low
Off
1

See Advanced User's Guide

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

145

MENU
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Print Reports

Transmission

View on LCD

—

You can view the
Transmission
Verification Report
for your last 200
outgoing faxes and
print the last report.

See 1.

Print Report

Help List

—

Prints the Help List so
you can see at-aglance how to quickly
program your
machine.

Tel Index List

Numerical
Order

—

Lists names and
numbers stored in
the One Touch and
Speed Dial memory,
in numerical or
alphabetical order.

Alphabetical
Order

—

Fax Journal —

—

Lists information
about your last 200
incoming and
outgoing faxes.
(TX means Transmit.
RX means Receive.)

User Settings

—

Lists your settings.

Network Config

—

Lists your Network
settings.

Drum Dot Print

—

Prints the drum dot
check sheet.

WLAN Report

—

Prints the result of
wireless LAN
connectivity
diagnosis.

See Advanced User's Guide

See Quick Setup Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

146

See 2.

Menu and features

MENU
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Options

Descriptions

Network1

Wired LAN

TCP/IP

Boot Method

—

Auto*

Chooses the BOOT
method that best
suits your needs.

Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP

(IP Boot Tries)

3*
[00000-32767]

Specifies the
number of setting
trials when the
Boot Method
allows automatic IP
setting.

IP Address

—

[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]

Enter the IP
address.

Subnet Mask

—

[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]

Enter the Subnet
mask.

Gateway

—

[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]

Enter the Gateway
address.

Node Name

—

BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX

Enter the Node
name.
(Up to 32
characters)

WINS Config

—

Auto*

Chooses the WINS
configuration mode.

WINS Server

—

Static
Primary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or
secondary WINS
server.

Secondary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

147

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Options

Descriptions

Network1

Wired LAN

TCP/IP

DNS Server

—

Primary

(Continued)

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or
secondary DNS
server.

[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Secondary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
APIPA

—

On*
Off

IPv6

—

On
Off*

Ethernet

—

Auto*
100B-FD

Automatically
allocates the IP
address from the
link-local address
range.
Enable or Disable
the IPv6 protocol. If
you want to use the
IPv6 protocol, visit
http://solutions.
brother.com/
for more
information.
Chooses the
Ethernet link mode.

100B-HD
10B-FD
10B-HD
Wired Status

—

Active 100B-FD
Active 100B-HD

You can see the
current wired
status.

Active 10B-FD
Active 10B-HD
InActive
Wired OFF
—

—

Shows the MAC
address of the
machine.

Set to Default —

—

Yes

Restore the wired
network setting to
factory default.

MAC Address

No
Wired Enable

—

On*
Off

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

148

Enable or Disable
the Wired LAN
manually.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Options

Descriptions

Network1

WLAN

TCP/IP

Boot Method

—

Auto*

Chooses the BOOT
method that best
suits your needs.

(Continued)

Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP

(IP Boot Tries) —

3*
[00000-32767]

Specifies the
number of setting
trials when the
Boot Method
allows automatic IP
setting.

IP Address

—

[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]

Enter the IP
address.

Subnet Mask

—

[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]

Enter the Subnet
mask.

Gateway

—

[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]

Enter the Gateway
address.

Node Name

—

BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX

Enter the Node
name.
(Up to 32
characters)

WINS Config

—

Auto*

Chooses the WINS
configuration mode.

WINS Server

—

Static
Primary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or
secondary WINS
server.

Secondary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

149

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Options

Descriptions

Network1

WLAN

TCP/IP

DNS Server

—

Primary

(Continued)

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or
secondary DNS
server.

[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Secondary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
APIPA

—

On*
Off

IPv6

—

On
Off*

—

You can configure
your internal print
server.

WPS/AOSS

—

You can easily
configure your
wireless network
settings using the
one-button push
method.

WPS w/PIN Code —

—

You can easily
configure your
wireless network
settings using WPS
with a PIN code.

WLAN Status

—

Active(11b)

You can see the
current wireless
network status.

Status

Wired LAN Active
WLAN Off
AOSS Active
Connection Fail
See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

150

Enable or Disable
the IPv6 protocol. If
you want to use the
IPv6 protocol, visit
http://solutions.
brother.com/
for more
information.

Setup Wizard

Active(11g)

Automatically
allocates the IP
address from the
link-local address
range.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Options

Descriptions

Network1

WLAN

WLAN Status

Signal

—

Strong

(Continued)

You can see the
current wireless
network signal
strength.

Medium
Weak
None
SSID

—

You can see the
current SSID.

Comm. Mode

—

Ad-hoc

You can see the
current
Communication
Mode.

Infrastructure
None
MAC Address

—

Shows the MAC
address of the
machine.

Set to Default

—

Yes

Restore the
wireless network
settings to factory
default.

WLAN Enable

—

On
Off*

E-mail/IFAX

Enable or disable
the wireless LAN
manually.

Mail Address

—

Enter the mail
address. (Up to 60
characters)

Setup Server

SMTP

SMTP Server

Name
(Up to 64
characters)

Enter the SMTP
server address.

IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
SMTP Port

25*
[00001-65535]

Auth. for SMTP None*
SMTP-AUTH

Enter the SMTP
port number.
Selects the Security
method for E-mail
notification.

POP bef. SMTP
SMTP SSL/TLS

None*
SSL
TLS

Verify SMTPCert.

On
Off*

You can send or
receive an E-mail
via an E-mail server
that requires secure
SSL/TLS
communication.
Verify the SMTP
Server Certificate
automatically.

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

151

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Options

Descriptions

Network1

E-mail/IFAX

Setup Server

POP3

POP3 Server

(Continued)

Name
(Up to 64
characters)

Enter the POP3
server address.

IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
POP3 Port

110*
[00001-65535]

Mailbox Name

—

Enter the mail box
name. (Up to 60
characters)

Mailbox Pwd

—

Enter the password
to login to the POP3
server. (Up to 32
characters)

POP3 SSL/TLS

None*

You can send or
receive an E-mail
via an E-mail server
that requires secure
SSL/TLS
communication.

SSL
TLS

Verify POP3Cert.

On
Off*

APOP

—

On*

Off*
Setup Mail RX

Auto Polling

Off

Poll Frequency

10*

(When Auto
Polling
is set to On.)

[01-60] Min

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

152

Enter the POP3
port number.

Verify the POP3
Server Certificate
automatically.
Enables or disables
APOP.
Automatically
checks the POP3
server for new
messages.
Sets the interval for
checking for new
messages on the
POP3 server.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Options

Descriptions

Network1

E-mail/IFAX

Setup Mail RX

Header

—

All

(Continued)

Selects the
contents of the mail
header to be
printed.

Subject+From+To
None*
Del Error Mail

—

Notification

—

On*
Off
On
MDN

Deletes error mails
automatically.
Receives
notification
messages.

Off*
Setup Mail TX

Sender Subject

—

Displays the subject
that is attached to
the Internet Fax
data.

Size Limit

—

Limits the size of
E-mail documents.

Notification

—

Off*
On
Off*
Setup Relay

Rly Broadcast

—

On
Off*

—

Registers the
Domain name.

Relay Report

—

Prints the Relay
Broadcast Report.

—

On
(Prefix/Suffix)
Off*

Network Reset

—

Yes
No

Relays a document
to another fax
machine.

Relay Domain

Off*
Fax to Server

Sends notification
messages.

You can store a
prefix/suffix
address in the
machine and can
send a document
from a fax server
system.
Restore all network
settings to factory
default.

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

153

MENU
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Machine Info.

Serial No.

—

You can check the
serial number of your
machine.

134

Page Counter

—

Total

You can check the
number of total
pages the machine
has printed during its
life.

See 1.

Fax/List
Copy
Print
Parts Life

Drum

—

Belt Unit

—

Fuser

—

Laser

—

PF Kit MP

—

PF Kit 1

—

PF Kit 2

—

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

154

You can check the
percentage of a
machine part’s life
that remains
available.
(PF Kit 2 appears
only if you installed
the optional
LT-300CL paper
tray.)

Page

Menu and features

MENU
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Initial Setup

Receive Mode

—

Fax Only*

Chooses the receive
mode that best suits
your needs.

Fax/Tel

Page

External TAD
Manual
Date&Time

Date&Time

—

Puts the date and
time on the LCD and
in headings of faxes
you send.

See 2.

Auto Daylight

—

Changes for Daylight
Savings Time
automatically.

See 1.

See 3.

Off*

Station ID

Time Zone

—

UTCXXX:XX

Sets the time zone for
your country.

—

Fax:

Sets up your name
and fax number to
appear on each page
you fax.

Tel:
Name:
Tone/Pulse

—

Tone*

—

Detection

(in Canada)
Dial Tone

Pulse

No Detection*
Dial Prefix

—

On
Off*

Reset

Network

—

Yes
No

Address & Fax

—

Yes
No

All Settings

—

Yes
No

See Advanced User's Guide.

See Quick Setup Guide.

See Network User's Guide.

Chooses the dialing
mode.
You can shorten the
dial tone detect
pause.

126

Sets a prefix number
that will always be
added before the fax
number every time
you dial.

See 1.

Restores all network
settings to factory
default.

134

Restores all stored
phone numbers and
fax settings.
Restores all the
machine settings to
the factory default.

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

155

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Initial Setup

Local Language

—

(in USA)

Allows you to change
the LCD language for
your country.

See 2.

(Continued)

English*
Español
(in Canada)
English*
Français
1

See Advanced User's Guide.

See Quick Setup Guide.

See Network User's Guide.

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

156

Menu and features

FAX (

)

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Address Book

Set One Touch Dial

—

Stores up to 40 One
Touch Dial numbers,
so you can dial by
pressing one key
(and Black Start or
Color Start).

Set Speed Dial

—

Stores up to 300
Speed Dial numbers,
so you can dial by
pressing only a few
keys (and
Black Start or
Color Start).

Setup Groups

—

Sets up to 20 Group
numbers for
Broadcasting.

See 1.

Change

—

You can change One
Touch and Speed
Dial numbers.

Delete

—

You can delete One
Touch and Speed
Dial numbers.

—

Off*

Sets the duplex
scanning format.

Duplex Fax

—

DuplexScan
:LongEdge

Page

DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
Volume

—

(Appears after
pressing
Hook)

Off
Low

Adjusts the volume
level of the speaker.

Med*
High

Fax Resolution

—

Standard*
Fine

Sets the resolution
for outgoing faxes.

S.Fine
Photo
Contrast

—

Auto*
Light

Changes the
lightness or darkness
of faxes you send.

Dark
1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

157

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Glass ScanSize

—

To fax an A4, Legal
or Folio size
document, you'll
need to change the
Glass Scan Size
setting.

Letter*
Legal/Folio

Broadcasting

Delayed Fax

Manual

—

Address Book

—

On
Off*

Real Time TX

—

Polled TX

—

On
Off*
On
Off*

Coverpage Setup

—

On
Off*

Polling RX

—

On
Off*

Overseas Mode

—

On
Off*

Set New Default

—

Fax Resolution
Contrast

You can send the
same fax message to
more than one fax
number.
Sets the time of day
in 24 hour format that
delayed faxes will be
sent.
Sends a fax without
using the memory.
Sets up your
machine with a
document to be
retrieved by another
fax machine.
Automatically sends
a cover page you
have programmed.
Sets up your
machine to poll
another fax machine.
If you are having
difficulty sending
faxes overseas, set
this to On.
You can save your
fax settings as the
default settings.

Glass ScanSize
Real Time TX
Coverpage Setup
Factory Reset

—

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

158

You can restore all
fax settings to the
factory settings.

Page
29

See 1.

Menu and features

COPY (

)

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Options 1

Options 2

Descriptions

Page

Quality

—

Auto*

—

You can choose the
Copy resolution for
your type of
document.

See 1.

100%*

—

Enlarge

104% EXE i LTR

Text
Photo
Graph
Enlarge/Reduce

—

141% A5 i A4

You can choose the
enlargement ratio for
the next copy.

200%
Reduce

50%
70% A4 i A5
78% LGL i LTR

You can choose the
reduction ratio for the
next copy.

83% LGL i A4
85% LTR i EXE
91% Full Page
94% A4 i LTR
97% LTR i A4

Duplex Copy

—

Custom (25-400%)

—

You can enter an
enlargement or
reduction ratio.

Off*

—

Enables or disables
duplex printing. You
can also choose long
edge or short edge
duplex printing.

—

Chooses the tray that
will be used for the
copy operation.

2sidei2side
1sidei2side
LongEdgeFlip
2sidei1side
LongEdgeFlip
1sidei2side
ShortEdgeFlip
2sidei1side
ShortEdgeFlip
Tray Use

—

Tray#1 Only
Tray#2 Only
MP Only
MP>T1>T2*
T1>T2>MP

(Tray#2 or T2
appears only if
you installed the
optional paper
tray.)
1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

159

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Brightness

—

Options 1

Options 2

Descriptions

Page

—

Adjusts the
brightness for copies.

See 1.

—

Adjusts the contrast
for copies.

—

You can choose to
stack or sort multiple
copies.

—

You can make N in 1
and 2 in 1 ID copies.

-2
-1
0
+1
+2

Contrast

—

—
-2
-1
0
+1
+2

Stack/Sort

—

Stack*
Sort

Page Layout

—

Off(1in1)*
2in1(P)
2in1(L)
2in1(ID)
4in1(P)
4in1(L)

Color Adjust

—

Red
-2

Adjusts the red color
for copies.

-1
0
+1
+2

Green
-2
-1
0
+1
+2

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

160

Adjusts the green
color for copies.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Options 1

Color Adjust

—

Blue

Options 2
-2

(Continued)

Descriptions

Page

Adjusts the blue color
for copies.

See 1.

-1
0
+1
+2

Set New Default

—

Quality

—

You can save your
copy settings as the
default settings.

Brightness
Contrast
Color Adjust
Factory Reset

—

You can restore all
copy settings to the
factory settings.

Favorite Settings

Store

Favorite:1

Rename

—

Favorite:2

Rename

Favorite:3

Rename

After you make
changes to the
following settings,
you can store them
as one of your
Favorite settings:
Quality
Enlarge/Reduce
Duplex Copy
Tray Use
Brightness
Contrast
Stack/Sort
Page Layout
Color Adjust

Rename

Favorite

—

Favorite:1

Rename

—

Favorite:2

Rename

—

Favorite:3

Rename

—

Favorite:1

—

Favorite:2

You can rename your
Favorite settings.

You can apply your
Favorite settings as
the default settings.

Favorite:3
1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

161

SCAN (

)

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Scan to USB

Quality

—

Color 100 dpi*

You can choose the
scan resolution and
file format for your
document.

See 1.

Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
File Type

—

(If you chose a
Color or Gray
option in the
Quality setting)
PDF*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
JPEG
XPS
(If you chose a
B&W option in
the Quality
setting)
PDF*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
TIFF

Duplex Scan

—

Off*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge

Chooses the duplex
scanning format.

DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
File Name
1

—

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

162

Enter a file name for
the scanned data.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Scan to USB

Glass ScanSize

—

To scan an A4, Legal
or Folio size
document, you'll
need to change the
Glass Scan Size
setting.

See 1.

(Continued)

Letter*
Legal/Folio

File Size

—

Small
Middle*

You can choose the
file size for color or
gray scale scanning.

Large
Set New Default

—

Quality
File Type
Glass ScanSize

You can save your
scan to USB settings
as the default
settings.

File Size

Scan to Network

Factory Reset

—

You can restore all
scan to USB settings
to the factory
settings.

(Profile name)

Quality

—

Color 100 dpi*

You can choose the
scan resolution and
file format for your
document.

Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
File Type

—

(If you chose a
Color or Gray
option in the
Quality setting)
PDF*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF

JPEG
XPS
1

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

163

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Scan to Network

(Profile name)

File Type

—

(Continued)

(If you chose a
B&W option in
the Quality
setting)

Descriptions

See 1.

PDF*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
TIFF
Duplex Scan

—

Off*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge

Chooses the duplex
scanning format.

DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
Glass ScanSize

—

A4
Letter*
Legal/Folio

File Size

—

Small
Middle*

To scan an A4, Legal
or Folio size
document, you'll
need to change the
Glass Scan Size
setting.
You can choose the
file size for color or
gray scale scanning.

Large
File Name

—

BRNXXXXXXXXXX*
Estimate
Report
Order sheet

You can choose
preset file names. If
you choose
, you can
name the file as you
like.

Contract sheet
Check
Receipt

Scan to FTP

(Profile name)

Quality

—

Color 100 dpi*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

164

Page

You can choose the
scan resolution and
file format for your
document.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Scan to FTP

(Profile name)

File Type

—

(Continued)

(If you chose a
Color or Gray
option in the
Quality setting)

Descriptions

Page
See 1.

PDF*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
JPEG
XPS
(If you chose a
B&W option in
the Quality
setting)
PDF*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
TIFF
Duplex Scan

—

Off*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge

Chooses the duplex
scanning format.

DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
Glass ScanSize

—

A4
Letter*
Legal/Folio

File Size

—

Small
Middle*

To scan an A4, Legal
or Folio size
document, you'll
need to change the
Glass Scan Size
setting.
You can choose the
file size for color or
gray scale scanning.

Large
File Name

—

BRNXXXXXXXXXX*
Estimate
Report
Order sheet

You can choose
preset file names. If
you choose
, you can
name the file as you
like.

Contract sheet
Check
Receipt

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

165

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Scan to E-mail

Manual/Address Book

Quality

—

Color 100 dpi*

You can choose the
scan resolution and
file format for your
document.

See 1.

Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
File Type

—

(If you chose a
Color or Gray
option in the
Quality setting)
PDF*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
JPEG
XPS

—

(If you chose a
B&W option in
the Quality
setting)
PDF*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
TIFF

Duplex Scan

—

Off*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge

Chooses the duplex
scanning format.

DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
Glass ScanSize

—

A4
Letter*
Legal/Folio

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

166

To scan an A4, Legal
or Folio size
document, you'll
need to change the
Glass Scan Size
setting.

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Scan to E-mail

Manual/Address Book

File Size

—

Small

See 1.

(Continued)

You can choose the
file size for color or
gray scale scanning.

Middle*
Large
Number of Destinations

—

Set New Default —

—

You can add multiple
destination E-mail
addresses.

Quality

You can save your
scan to E-mail
settings as the
default settings.

File Type
Glass ScanSize
File Size

Scan to PC

Factory Reset

—

You can restore all
scan to E-mail
settings to the factory
settings.

E-mail

—

You can scan a black
& white or a color
document into your
E-mail application.

Image

—

You can scan a color
picture into your
graphics application.

OCR

—

You can have your
text document
converted to an
editable text file.

File

—

You can scan a black
& white or a color
document into your
computer.

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

167

Other Functions

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Direct Print

(Select File)

Print Settings /
(Copy Pages
(001–999))

Paper Size

Sets the paper size
when printing directly
from the USB flash
memory drive.

Sets the print media
type when printing
directly from the USB
flash memory drive.

Sets the page layout
when printing
multiple pages
directly from the USB
Flash memory drive.

Sets the page
orientation when
printing directly from
the USB Flash
memory drive.

Chooses the duplex
print format when
print directly from the
USB Flash memory
drive.

Letter*
Legal

Page

Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio
Paper Type

Thin
Plain*
Thick
Thicker
Recycled Paper
Glossy

Multiple Page

1in1*
2in1
4in1
9in1
16in1
25in1
1 in 2x2 pages
1 in 3x3 pages
1 in 4x4 pages
1 in 5x5 pages

Orientation

Portrait*
Landscape

Duplex

Off*
Long Edge
Short Edge

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected
to the USB direct interface.

168

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Direct Print

(Select File)

Collate

On*

(Continued)

Enables or disables
page collation when
printing directly from
the USB Flash
memory drive.

(Continued)

Print Settings /
(Copy Pages
(001–999))

Chooses the tray
when printing directly
from the USB Flash
memory drive.

Sets the print quality
option when printing
directly from the USB
Flash memory drive.

PDF Option

Sets the USB direct
print setting whether
Document&Markup
to print comments
Document&Stamps (Markup) or stamps
in the PDF file along
with the text.

Off

(Continued)
Tray Use

Auto*
MP Only
Tray#1 Only

Page

Tray#2 Only
(Tray#2 Only
appears only if
you installed the
optional paper
tray.)
Print Quality

Normal*
Fine

Document*

Index Print

—

You can print a
thumbnail page.

Default Settings

Paper Size

—

Sets the default
paper size when
printing directly from
the USB flash
memory drive.

Letter*
Legal
Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio
1

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected
to the USB direct interface.

169

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Direct Print

Default Settings

Paper Type

—

Thin

(Continued)

Sets the default
media type when
printing directly from
the USB flash
memory drive.

Sets the default page
style when printing
multiple pages
directly from the USB
Flash memory drive.

Sets the default page
orientation when
printing directly from
the USB Flash
memory drive.

Enables or disables
default page collation
when printing directly
from the USB Flash
memory drive.

Sets the default print
quality option when
printing directly from
the USB Flash
memory drive.

Sets the default USB
direct print setting
whether to print
comments (Markup)
or stamps in the PDF
file along with the
text.

Sets the default index
print option, simple
format or details.

Plain*
Thick
Thicker

Page

Recycled Paper
Glossy
Multiple Page —

1in1*
2in1
4in1
9in1
16in1
25in1
1 in 2x2 pages
1 in 3x3 pages
1 in 4x4 pages
1 in 5x5 pages

Orientation —

Portrait*
Landscape

Collate

—

On*
Off

Print Quality —

Normal*
Fine

PDF Option

—

Document*
Document&Markup
Document&Stamps

Index Print —

Simple*
Details

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected
to the USB direct interface.

170

Menu and features

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Descriptions

Page

Secure Print

(Select User)

(Select Secure
Print Job)

Password:

You can print data
saved in the memory
drive when you enter
your four-digit
password.

See 1.

Delete

(The Secure Print
button on the LCD
becomes active
when there is secure
data.)
1

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected
to the USB direct interface.

171

Entering text

When you are setting certain menu selections, you may need to enter text into the machine.
Press
to choose numbers, letters or special characters. Up to six letters are assigned to each
button on the LCD.
By pressing the correct button repeatedly, you can access the character you want.

Inserting spaces
To enter a space, press

to choose special characters, then press the space button

Note
The characters available may differ depending on your country.

Making corrections
If you entered an incorrect character and want to change it, use the arrow buttons to move the
cursor under the incorrect character. Then press
. Re-enter the correct character. You can also
insert letters by moving the cursor and entering a character.
Repeating letters
If you need to enter a letter that is on the same button as the letter before it, press c to move the
cursor to the right before you press the same button again.

172

Specifications

General

Note
This chapter provides a summary of the machine’s specifications. For additional specifications
visit http://www.brother.com/ for details.

Printer Type

Laser

Print Method

Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam scanning

Memory Capacity

256 MB

LCD (liquid crystal
display)

Touchscreen 5 in. (12.6 cm) Color LCD 1

Power Source
Power Consumption

110 - 120 V AC 50/60 Hz
2

Peak:

1200 W

Copying (Average):

Approx. 615 W 3

Sleep (WLAN: On)
(Average):

Approx. 10 W

Deep Sleep (Average):

Approx. 1.8 W

Ready (Average):

Approx. 75 W

Measured diagonally

USB connection to PC

When making a copy from one sheet

Dimensions

20.9 in.
(530 mm)

20.7 in.
(526 mm)

19.3 in.
(490 mm)

Weight

With Consumables:

62.8 lb (28.5 kg)

173

Noise level

Sound power
Operating
(Colour Printing):

LWAd = 6.94 B (A)

Operating
(Monochrome Printing):

LWAd = 6.88 B (A)

Ready:

LWAd = 4.8 B (A)

Sound pressure

Temperature
Humidity
ADF (automatic document
feeder)

174

Operating (Printing):

LPAm = 57 dB (A)

Ready:

LPAm = 33 dB (A)

Operating:

50 °F to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

Storage:

32 °F to 104 °F (0 to 40 °C)

Operating:

20 to 80% (without condensation)

Storage:

10 to 90% (without condensation)

Up to 50 pages (Staggered) 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Specifications

Document Size
Document Size
(Single-sided)

ADF Width:

5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm)

ADF Length:

5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356.0 mm)

Scanner Glass Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)
Width:
Scanner Glass Max. 14.0 in. (355.6 mm)
Length:
Document Size
(2-sided (Duplex))

ADF Width:

5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm)

ADF Length:

5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356.0 mm)

175

Print media
Paper Input

Paper Tray
 Paper Type:

Plain Paper, Thin Paper or Recycled Paper

 Paper Size:

Letter, A4, B5 (ISO/JIS), A5, A5 (Long
Edge), B6 (ISO), A6, Executive, Legal and
Folio

 Paper Weight:

16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)

 Maximum Paper Tray
Capacity:

Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Plain Paper

Multi-purpose tray (MP tray)
 Paper Type:

Envelope, Env. Thin, Env. Thick, Labels 1,
Glossy Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,
Thicker Paper, Recycled Paper,
Bond Paper or Plain Paper

 Paper Size:

Width: 2.75 to 8.5 in. (69.8 to 216 mm)
Length: 4.57 to 16 in.
(116.0 to 406.4 mm)

 Paper Weight:

16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m2)

 Maximum Paper Tray
Capacity:

Up to 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) Plain
Paper

Paper Tray 2 (option)
 Paper Type:

Plain Paper, Thin Paper or Recycled Paper

 Paper Size:

Letter, A4, B5 (ISO/JIS), A5, B6 (ISO),
Executive, Legal and Folio

 Paper Weight:

16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)

 Maximum Paper Tray
Capacity:

Up to 500 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Plain Paper

Paper Output Face-Down Output Tray
Face-Up Output Tray

176

Up to 150 sheets (face down print delivery
to the Face down output tray)
One sheet (face up print delivery to the
Face up output tray)

Specifications

Duplex
Printing

 Manual Duplex:

Yes

 Automatic Duplex:

Yes

 Paper Size
(Automatic Duplex):

Letter, Legal and Folio

 Paper Weight
(Automatic Duplex):

16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)

 Paper Type
(Automatic Duplex):

Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Recycled Paper
or Glossy Paper

For labels, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine
to avoid the possibility of smudging.

177

Fax

Compatibility

ITU-T Super Group 3

Modem Speed

Automatic Fallback:

2-sided (Duplex) Print
Receiving

Yes

Automatic 2-sided (Duplex)
Sending

Yes (from ADF)

Scanning Width

Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)

Printing Width

Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)

Gray Scale

8 bit/256 levels

Resolution

Horizontal:

33,600 bps

203 dot/in. (8 dot/mm)

Vertical
 Standard:

98 line/in. (3.85 line/mm) (Mono)
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Color)

 Fine:

196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Mono)
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Color)

 Photo:

196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Mono)

 Superfine:

392 line/in. (15.4 line/mm) (Mono)

One Touch Dial

40 (20 × 2)

Speed Dial

300 stations

Groups

Up to 20

Broadcasting

390 stations

Automatic Redial

Yes, 1 time after 5 minutes

Memory Transmission

Up to 500 1 pages 2

Out of Paper Reception

Up to 500 1 pages 2

‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Specifications
and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

Black & White only

178

Specifications

Copy

Color/Mono

Yes/Yes

Copy Width

Max. 8.3 in. (210 mm)

Automatic 2-sided (Duplex)
Copy

Yes (from ADF)

Multiple Copies

Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages

Reduce/Enlarge

25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)

Resolution

Up to 1200 × 600 dpi

First Copy Out Time
(Monochrome)

Less than 19 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

First Copy Out Time (Color)

Less than 21 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

179

Scanner

Color/Mono

Yes/Yes

TWAIN Compliant

Yes (Windows® 2000 Professional/Windows® XP/
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista ®/
Windows® 7)
Mac OS X 10.4.11 – 10.6.x 1

WIA Compliant

Yes (Windows® XP/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7)

ICA Compliant

Yes (Mac OS X 10.6.x)

Color Depth

48 bit internal / 24 bit external color

Resolution

Up to 19200 × 19200 dpi (interpolated) 2
Up to 1200 × 2400 dpi (optical) (from Scanner Glass)
Up to 1200 × 600 dpi (optical) (from ADF)

Scanning Width

Max. 8.3 in. (210 mm)

Automatic 2-sided
(Duplex) Scanning

Yes (from ADF)

Gray Scale

256 levels

For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

Maximum 1200 × 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows® XP, Windows Vista® and Windows® 7
(resolution up to 19200 × 19200 dpi can be chosen by using the scanner utility)

180

Specifications

Printer

Automatic 2-sided
(Duplex) Print

Yes

Emulations

PCL6, BR-Script3 (PostScript® 3™)

Resolution

600 dpi × 600 dpi, 2400 dpi (2400 × 600) quality

Print Speed
Up to 14 sides/minute (7 sheets/minute)
(Monochrome Duplex) (Letter size) 1

Print Speed
(Color Duplex)

Up to 14 sides/minute (7 sheets/minute)
(Letter size) 1

Print Speed
(Monochrome)

Up to 30 pages/minute (Letter size) 1

Print Speed
(Color)

Up to 30 pages/minute (Letter size) 1

First Print Out Time
(Monochrome)

Less than 16 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

First Print Out Time
(Color)

Less than 16 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

The print speed may vary depending on the type of document you print.

181

Interfaces

USB

It is recommended you use a USB 2.0 cable (Type A/B) that is no
more than 6 feet (2 meters) long. 1 2

Ethernet 3

Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.

Wireless LAN 3

IEEE 802.11 b/g (Infrastructure / Ad-hoc Mode)

Your machine has a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a
USB 1.1 interface.

Third party USB ports are not supported.

See Network (LAN) on page 188 and the Network User's Guide for detailed network specifications.

182

Specifications

Direct Print feature

Compatibility

PDF version 1.7 1, JPEG, Exif + JPEG, PRN (created by Brother
printer driver), TIFF (scanned by all Brother MFC or DCP models),
PostScript® 3™ (created by Brother BR-Script 3 printer driver), XPS
version 1.0.

Interface

USB direct interface

PDF data including a JBIG2 image file, a JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not supported.

183

Scan to USB feature
File formats

Black and white
TIFF, PDF, PDF/A, Secure PDF, Signed PDF
Color and Gray document
JPEG, PDF, PDF/A, Secure PDF, Signed PDF, XPS

184

Specifications

Computer requirements

Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions
Computer Platform &
Operating System
Version

Processor
Minimum Speed

Windows®
Operating

Windows®
2000

Intel® Pentium ® II
or equivalent

System 1

Professional 5

Minimum
RAM

64 MB

Recommended
RAM

256 MB

Hard Disk Space
to install
For
Drivers

For
Applications

150 MB

500 MB

1.2 GB

128 MB

Windows®
XP

Supported Supported
PC
PC
Software Interface 3
Functions
Printing, USB,
PC-Fax 4, 10/100
Scanning Base Tx
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11 b/g

Home 2 6
Windows®
XP
Professional 2 6
Windows®
XP
Professional
x64
Edition 2 6

64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64)
supported CPU

256 MB

512 MB

Windows

Intel® Pentium ® 4
or equivalent

512 MB

1 GB

500 MB

1 GB
(32-bit)
2 GB
(64-bit)

650 MB

Vista® 2 6

64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64)
supported CPU
Windows®
726

Intel® Pentium ® 4
or equivalent
64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64)
supported CPU

185

Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions
Computer Platform &
Operating System
Version
Windows
Server®

Processor
Minimum Speed

Intel® Pentium® III
or equivalent

Minimum
RAM

Recommended Hard Disk Space
RAM
to install

256 MB

512 MB

2 GB

512 MB

1 GB

2 GB

For
Drivers

For
Applications

Supported Supported
PC
PC
Software Interface 3
Functions

50 MB

N/A

Printing

80 MB

400 MB

Printing, USB,
PC-Fax 10/100
Send 4, Base Tx
Scanning (Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11 b/g

2003
(print only
via
network)
Windows
Server®
2003 x64
Edition
(print only
via
network)
Windows
Server®

64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64)
supported CPU

Intel® Pentium® 4
or equivalent

2008
(print only
via
network)

64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64)
supported CPU

Windows

64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64)
supported CPU

Server®
2008 R2
(print only
via
network)
Macintosh Mac OS X
Operating 10.4.11
10.5.x
System
Mac OS X
10.6.x

10/100
Base Tx
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11 b/g

PowerPC®
G4/G5
Intel® Core™
Processor
Intel® Core™
Processor

Internet Explorer® 6.0 or greater.

For WIA, 1200 x 1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.

Third party USB ports are not supported.

PC-Fax supports black and white only. (Letter/A4 size)

PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft® SP4 or higher for Windows® 2000. (Available from the Internet)

PaperPort™ 12SE supports Microsoft® SP3 or higher for Windows® XP and SP2 or higher for Windows Vista® and
Windows® 7.

For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/.
All trademarks, brand and product names are property of their respective companies.

186

Specifications

Consumable items
Toner Cartridge Life

Starter Toner Cartridge:
Black

Approx. 2,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow

Approx. 1,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

Standard Toner Cartridge:
TN-310BK (Black):

Approx. 2,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

TN-310C (Cyan):

Approx. 1,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

TN-310M (Magenta):

Approx. 1,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

TN-310Y (Yellow):

Approx. 1,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

High Capacity Toner Cartridge:
TN-315BK (Black):

Approx. 6,000 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

TN-315C (Cyan):

Approx. 3,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

TN-315M (Magenta):

Approx. 3,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

TN-315Y (Yellow):

Approx. 3,500 pages
(Letter or A4) 1

Drum Unit

DR-310CL

Approx. 25,000 pages
(Letter or A4) 2

Belt Unit

BU-300CL

Approx. 50,000 pages
(Letter or A4) 3

Waste Toner Box

WT-300CL

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of use.

Approx. yield is based on Letter or A4 single-sided pages.

Approx. 50,000 pages
(Letter or A4) 3

187

Network (LAN)

Note
For details about the full Network specifications, see Network User's Guide.

LAN

You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,
Network Scanning, PC-Fax Send, PC-Fax Receive (Windows® only)
and Remote Setup 1. Also included is Brother BRAdmin Light 2
Network Management software.

Security Protocols
 Wired

APOP, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPPS, HTTPS,
SMTP, POP), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-MD5, EAP-FAST, PEAP,
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos

 Wireless

APOP, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPPS, HTTPS,
SMTP, POP), SNMP v3

Wireless Network
Security

WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), 802.1x
(LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS)

Wireless Network
AOSS™
Setup Support Utility WPS

Yes
Yes

See Computer requirements on page 185.

BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.

188

Index

Accessories and supplies .......................... ii
ADF (automatic document feeder)
using .....................................................26
Answering machine (TAD)
connecting ............................................41
Apple Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide.
Automatic
fax receive ............................................34
easy receive .......................................36
fax redial ...............................................45

Data Ident-A-Call ..................................... 38
Dialing
a pause ................................................ 46
automatic fax redial .............................. 45
manual ................................................. 44
one touch ............................................. 44
speed dial ............................................. 44
using the Search .................................. 45
Direct print ............................................... 54
Direct key ............................................. 55
specification ....................................... 183
Distinctive ring ......................................... 38
choosing ring pattern ............................ 39
setting ring pattern ............................... 39
turning off ............................................. 40
Document
how to load ..................................... 26, 27
Drum unit
cleaning ................................................ 70
replacing ............................................... 75

B
Belt unit
replacing ...............................................82
Brother
accessories and supplies ........................ ii
Brother numbers ...................................... i
Customer Service .................................... i
FAQs (frequently asked questions) ......... i
product support ........................................ i
service centers ......................................... i
warranties .................................... iv, v, vii

C
Cleaning
corona wires .........................................70
Connecting
external TAD (answering machine) .......40
external telephone ................................42
Consumable items ...................... 60, 61, 62
Control panel overview .............................. 6
ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)
See Software User’s Guide.
ControlCenter4 (for Windows®)
See Software User’s Guide.
Cordless telephone (non-Brother) ............42
Custom Ringing .......................................38

E
Envelopes ............................. 14, 21, 22, 24
Equalization ........................................... 126
Error messages on LCD .......................... 95
Comm. Error ......................................... 95
No Paper .............................................. 98
Out of Memory ..................................... 99
Print Unable XX .................................... 99
Scan Unable XX ................................. 101
Extension telephone, using ..................... 43
External telephone, connecting ............... 42

189

Fax codes
changing ...............................................43
fax receive code ....................................43
telephone answer code .........................43
Fax, stand-alone
receiving ................................................32
easy receive .......................................36
from extension telephone ...................43
ring delay, setting ...............................35
telephone line interference ...............126
sending .................................................28
telephone line interference ...............126
Fax/Tel mode
answering at extension telephones .......43
easy receive ..........................................36
F/T ring time (double-ring) ....................35
fax receive code ....................................43
ring delay ..............................................35
telephone answer code .........................43
Folio .................................................. 18, 22

Labels ................................... 12, 21, 22, 25
LCD (liquid crystal display) ................ 6, 136

G
Gray scale ..................................... 178, 180

H
HELP
LCD messages ...................................136
Menu Table .........................................137
Hook key ............................................. 7, 42

M
Machine information
how to reset the machine ................... 135
reset functions .................................... 134
serial number ...................................... 134
Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide.
Maintenance, routine
replacing
belt unit .............................................. 82
drum unit ........................................... 75
toner cartridge ................................... 64
waste toner box ................................. 88
Manual
dialing ................................................... 44
receive ............................................ 32, 34
Menu Table ........................................... 137
Mode, entering
copy ...................................................... 53
fax ......................................................... 28
scan ........................................................ 6
Multi-line connections (PBX) ................... 41

Ident-A-Call ..............................................38
Ident-A-Ring .............................................38

Network
faxing
See Software User’s Guide.
printing
See Network User’s Guide.
scanning
See Software User’s Guide.

Jacks
EXT
external telephone .............................42
TAD (answering machine) .................40

One touch
changing ............................................... 51
setting up .............................................. 48
using ..................................................... 44
Out of Memory message ......................... 99

190

Paper .............................................. 21, 176
how to load ...........................................10
in paper tray .......................................10
in the multi-purpose tray ....................12
recommended ................................ 21, 22
size ................................................ 18, 21
tray capacity ..........................................22
type ................................................ 18, 21
PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR
See Software User’s Guide and Help in the
PaperPort™ 12SE application to access
How-to-Guides.
PC-Fax
See Software User’s Guide.
Personalized Ring ....................................38
Presto! PageManager
See Software User's Guide. See also Help
in the Presto! PageManager application.
Print
difficulties ................................... 117, 121
drivers .................................................181
quality ........................................ 123, 127
resolution ............................................181
specifications ......................................181
Printing
See Software User’s Guide.
Programming your machine ...................136

Redial/Pause key .............................. 45, 46
Remote setup
See Software User’s Guide.
Replacing
belt unit ................................................. 82
drum unit .............................................. 75
toner cartridge ...................................... 64
waste toner box .................................... 88
Reports
Transmission Verification ..................... 30
Resolution
copy .................................................... 179
fax (standard, fine, superfine,
photo) ................................................. 178
print .................................................... 181
scan .................................................... 180
Ring delay, setting ................................... 35
RingMaster .............................................. 38

Q
Quality
printing ....................................... 123, 127
Quick dial .................................................48
Group dial
changing ............................................51
One Touch dial
changing ............................................51
custom scan profile ............................48
setting up ...........................................48
using ..................................................44
Search ..................................................45
Speed Dial
changing ............................................51
custom scan profile ............................50
setting up ...........................................50
using ..................................................44

S
Scanner glass
using ..................................................... 27
Scanning
See Software User’s Guide.
Serial number
how to find ...............See inside front cover
Service centers ............................................i
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number
Ringing .................................................... 38
Smart Ring .............................................. 38
Speed dial
changing ............................................... 51
setting up .............................................. 50
using ..................................................... 44

191

TAD (telephone answering device),
external ............................................. 32, 34
connecting ...................................... 40, 41
recording OGM .....................................41
Teen Ring ................................................38
Telephone line
connections ...........................................41
difficulties ............................................117
interference .........................................126
multi-line (PBX) .....................................41
Text, entering .........................................172
Toner cartridge
replacing ...............................................64
Troubleshooting .....................................117
document jam ............................ 104, 105
error messages on LCD ........................95
if you are having difficulty
copy quality ......................................120
incoming calls ..................................120
network ............................................124
paper handling .................................123
print quality .............................. 123, 127
printing .................................... 117, 121
receiving faxes .................................118
scanning ...........................................122
sending faxes ...................................120
software ...........................................122
telephone line ...................................126
maintenance messages on LCD ...........95
paper jam .......... 106, 107, 108, 110, 114

Warranties
Canada .................................................. vii
Notice-Disclaimer ...................................iv
USA .........................................................v
Waste toner box
replacing ............................................... 88
Windows®
See Software User’s Guide.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User’s Guide.
World Wide Web .........................................i

V
Voice Mail ................................................37
VoIP .......................................................126

192

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS
(Canada only)
NOTICE
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
NOTICE
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices
does not exceed five.

Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6

Visit us on the World Wide Web
http://www.brother.com/

This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their
dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.

ADVANCED
USER’S GUIDE
MFC-9970CDW

Version A
USA/CAN

User's Guides and where do I find it?

Which manual?

What's in it?

Where is it?

Safety and Legal

Read this Guide first. Please read the
Safety Instructions before you set up your
machine. See this Guide for trademarks
and legal limitations.

Printed / In the Box

Quick Setup Guide

Follow the instructions for setting up your
machine and installing the drivers and
software for the operating system and
connection type you are using.

Printed / In the Box

Basic User's Guide

Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and
Direct Print operations and how to replace
consumables. See troubleshooting tips.

Printed / In the Box

Advanced User's Guide

Learn more advanced operations: Fax,
Copy, security features, printing reports
and performing routine maintenance.

PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the Box

Software User's Guide

Follow these instructions for Printing,
Scanning, Network Scanning, Remote
Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother
ControlCenter utility.

PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the Box

Network Glossary

This Guide provides basic information
about advanced network features of
Brother machines along with explanations
about general networking and common
terms.

PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the Box

Network User's Guide

PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the Box

Table of Contents
1

General Setup

Memory storage..................................................................................................... 1
Volume settings ..................................................................................................... 1
Ring volume..................................................................................................... 1
Beeper volume ................................................................................................ 2
Speaker volume............................................................................................... 2
Automatic daylight savings time ............................................................................ 3
Ecology features.................................................................................................... 3
Toner Save ...................................................................................................... 3
Sleep mode ..................................................................................................... 4
Deep Sleep mode ............................................................................................ 4
LCD screen............................................................................................................ 5
Setting the backlight brightness....................................................................... 5
Setting the Dim Timer for the backlight ........................................................... 5
Dial Prefix .............................................................................................................. 5
Setting up the prefix number ........................................................................... 5
Changing the prefix number ............................................................................ 6
Mode Timer............................................................................................................ 6

Security features

Secure Function Lock 2.0 ...................................................................................... 7
Setting and changing the Administrator Password .......................................... 8
Setting up and changing the Public user mode ............................................... 9
Setting up and changing restricted users ........................................................ 9
Turning Secure Function Lock on/off.............................................................11
Switching Users............................................................................................. 12
Setting Lock......................................................................................................... 13
Setting up the password ................................................................................13
Changing your Setting Lock password ..........................................................14
Turning Setting Lock on/off............................................................................ 14
Restricting dialing ................................................................................................15
Dial pad restriction .........................................................................................15
One Touch restriction ....................................................................................15
Speed Dial restriction ....................................................................................15
LDAP server restriction..................................................................................16

Sending a fax

Additional sending options................................................................................... 17
Sending faxes using multiple settings ........................................................... 17
Changing a 2-sided fax layout ....................................................................... 17
Contrast ......................................................................................................... 18
Changing Fax Resolution .............................................................................. 18

Additional sending operations..............................................................................19
Sending a fax manually .................................................................................19
Sending a fax at the end of a conversation ...................................................19
Dual access (black & white only) ...................................................................20
Broadcasting (black & white only) .................................................................20
Real Time Transmission ................................................................................22
Overseas Mode .............................................................................................22
Delayed Fax (black & white only) ..................................................................22
Delayed batch transmission (black & white only) ..........................................23
Checking and canceling waiting jobs.............................................................23
Setting your changes as the new default.......................................................24
Restoring all fax settings to the factory settings ............................................24
Electronic cover page (black & white only) ....................................................25
Polling overview ...................................................................................................27
Polled transmit (black & white only)...............................................................27

Receiving a fax

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)............................................................28
Receiving faxes into memory when the paper tray is empty .........................28
Fax Forwarding..............................................................................................28
Paging ...........................................................................................................29
Fax Storage ...................................................................................................30
PC-Fax Receive ............................................................................................31
Changing Remote Fax Options .....................................................................32
Remote retrieval ............................................................................................33
Remote fax commands..................................................................................35
Additional receiving operations ............................................................................36
Printing a reduced incoming fax ....................................................................36
Duplex (2-sided) printing for Fax mode .........................................................36
Setting the Fax Receive Stamp (black & white only) .....................................37
Receiving a fax at the end of a conversation.................................................37
Setting the Print Density ................................................................................38
Printing a fax from the memory .....................................................................38
Polling overview ...................................................................................................39
Polling receive ...............................................................................................39

Dialing and storing numbers

Telephone line services .......................................................................................41
Tone or Pulse (Canada only).........................................................................41
For Fax/Tel mode only...................................................................................41
Special line considerations ............................................................................41
Additional dialing operations ................................................................................43
Dialing access codes and credit card numbers .............................................43
Additional ways to store numbers ........................................................................44
Setting up Groups for Broadcasting ..............................................................44
Options for Setting Up Groups ......................................................................46
Changing Group numbers .............................................................................47
Deleting Group numbers ...............................................................................48

iii

Printing reports

Fax reports........................................................................................................... 49
Transmission verification report..................................................................... 49
Fax Journal.................................................................................................... 49
Reports ................................................................................................................ 50
How to print a report ...................................................................................... 50

Making copies

Copy settings .......................................................................................................51
Stop copying.................................................................................................. 51
Improving copy quality................................................................................... 51
Enlarging or reducing the image copied ........................................................52
Duplex (2-sided) Copying .............................................................................. 53
Tray selection ................................................................................................54
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast ................................................................ 54
Sorting copies using the ADF ........................................................................ 55
Making N in 1 copies (page layout) ...............................................................55
2 in 1 ID Copy ................................................................................................57
Adjusting Color (Saturation) .......................................................................... 58
Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 58
Restoring all copy settings to the factory settings ......................................... 58
Setting your favorites ..................................................................................... 59

Routine maintenance

Cleaning and checking the machine....................................................................60
Cleaning the outside of the machine .............................................................60
Cleaning the scanner..................................................................................... 61
Cleaning the laser scanner windows .............................................................62
Cleaning the corona wires .............................................................................66
Cleaning the drum unit ..................................................................................70
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers................................................................. 78
Calibration .....................................................................................................79
Auto Registration ........................................................................................... 80
Manual Registration.......................................................................................80
Frequency (Color Correction) ........................................................................ 81
Checking the Page Counters.........................................................................81
Checking the remaining life of parts .............................................................. 82
Replacing periodic maintenance parts................................................................. 82
Packing and shipping the machine ......................................................................83

Options

Options ................................................................................................................ 93
Optional paper tray (LT-300CL)...........................................................................94
Memory board...................................................................................................... 94
SO-DIMM Types ............................................................................................94
Installing extra memory ................................................................................. 95

Glossary

Index

97
101

General Setup

Memory storage
Your menu settings are stored permanently,
and in the event of a power failure will not be
lost. Temporary settings (for example,
Contrast, Overseas Mode) will be lost. Also,
during a power failure the machine will retain
the date and time and programed fax timer
jobs (for example, Delayed Fax) for
approximately 60 hours. Other fax jobs in the
machine memory will not be lost.

Volume settings
Ring volume

You can choose a range of ring volume
levels, from High to Off.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.

d
e
f

Press Ring.

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press Low, Med, High or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 1

Beeper volume
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep
when you press a key, make a mistake, or
after you send or receive a fax. You can
choose a range of volume levels, from High
to Off.

a
b
c
d
e
f

Speaker volume
You can choose a range of speaker volume
levels, from High to Off.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.

d
e
f

Press Speaker.

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.
Press Beeper.
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press Low, Med, High or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.

You can also temporarily adjust the speaker
volume by pressing Hook.

a
b

Press Hook on the control panel.

c
d

Press Volume.

Press Hook on the control panel.

Press d or c on the Touchscreen to
display Volume.

Press
to decrease or
to
increase the speaker volume level.
Each button press changes the volume
to the next setting.

General Setup

Automatic daylight
savings time

Ecology features
1

Toner Save

You can set the machine to change
automatically for Daylight Savings Time. It
will set itself forward one hour in the Spring,
and back one hour in the Fall.

You can save toner using this feature. When
you set Toner Save to On, print appears
lighter. The default setting is Off.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Date&Time.
Press Date&Time.

Press a or b to display Ecology.
Press Ecology.

d
e
f

Press Auto Daylight.

d
e
f

Press Toner Save.

Press On or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.

Note
We do not recommend Toner Save for
printing Photo or Gray Scale images.

Chapter 1

Sleep mode

The Sleep Mode Setting can reduce power
consumption. When the machine is in Sleep
Mode (Power Save mode) it acts as though it
were turned off. Receiving data or starting an
operation wakes up the machine from Sleep
mode to Ready mode.
The timer will restart if any operation is
carried out on the machine, such as receiving
a fax or computer data or making a copy. The
default setting is 3 minutes.
When the machine goes into Sleep mode, the
LCD back light turns off.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Ecology.
Press Ecology.

d
e

Press Sleep Time.

Press Stop/Exit.

Using the dial pad on the Touchscreen,
enter the length of time the machine will
remain idle before entering sleep mode.
Press OK.

Deep Sleep mode
If the machine is in Sleep mode and does not
receive any jobs for a certain length of time,
the machine will go into Deep Sleep mode
automatically. Deep Sleep mode uses less
power than Sleep mode. The machine will
wake up and start warming up when the
machine receives a fax or computer data, or
when you press the Touchscreen or a key on
the control panel.
When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode,
the LCD backlight is Off and the mode keys
are dimmed.
If a wireless network is enabled, the machine
will not enter Deep Sleep mode. To disable
the wireless network, see Chapter 5 in the
Network User's Guide.
If the machine has secure print data it will not
enter Deep Sleep mode.

General Setup

LCD screen
Setting the backlight
brightness

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD
backlight. If you are having difficulty reading
the LCD, try changing the brightness setting.

a
b

Setting up the prefix number

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Dial Prefix.
Press Dial Prefix.

Do one of the following:

Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
Press LCD Settings.

d
e
f

Press Backlight.
Press Light, Med or Dark.

Press MENU.

e
f

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
Press LCD Settings.

d
e

Press Dim Timer.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.

 If you want to set the dial prefix
feature to off, press Off. Go to
step g.

You can set how long the LCD backlight stays
on after you go back to the Ready screen.

Press Off, 10 Secs, 20 Secs or
30 Secs.

 If you want to set the dial prefix
feature to on, press On. Go to
step e.

Press Stop/Exit.

Setting the Dim Timer for the
backlight

The Dial Prefix setting will automatically dial a
predefined number before every fax number
you dial. For example: If your telephone
system requires a 9 to dial an outside number
use this setting to automatically dial 9 for
every fax you send.

Press MENU.

a
b

Dial Prefix

Press Dial Prefix.
Enter the prefix number (up to 5 digits)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Note
• You can use the numbers and symbols 0
to 9, #, and l. (You cannot use ! with any
other numbers or symbols.)
• If your telephone system requires a time
break recall (hookflash), press ! to enter
the break.
• (Canada only) If pulse dialing mode is on,
# and l are not available to use.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 1

Changing the prefix number

a
b
c

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.
Press a or b to display Dial Prefix.
Press Dial Prefix.

Press On (or Off).
You can turn off the prefix number by
pressing Off. The prefix number will
remain off until you press On.

e
f

Press Dial Prefix.

Repeat until the prefix number is
correct, and then press OK.
 To exit without making a change,
press OK.

Mode Timer
The machine has three mode keys on the
control panel: FAX, SCAN, and COPY.
You can set how much time the machine
takes after the last Copy or Scan operation to
return to Fax mode. If you choose Off, the
machine will stay in the mode you used last.
This setting also sets the time the machine
will change from a restricted user to the
Public mode when using Secure Function
Lock. (See Switching Users on page 12.)

Do one of the following using the buttons
on the Touchscreen.
 To change the prefix number, press
d or c to position the cursor under the
digit to be deleted and press the
Back Space button
. Then press
the correct digit.

Press Stop/Exit.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Mode Timer.
Press Mode Timer.

Press 0 Sec, 30 Secs, 1 Min,
2 Mins, 5 Mins or Off.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Security features

Secure Function Lock 2.0
Secure Function Lock lets you restrict Public
access to the following machine functions:
 Fax Tx
 Fax Rx
 Copy
 Scan
 Direct Print
 Print
 Color Print

Note
• Secure Function Lock can be set manually
at the control panel or by using Web
Based Management. We recommend
using Web Based Management to
configure this feature. For more
information, see the Network User's
Guide.
• Only administrators can set limitations
and make changes for each user.
• Polling Receive is enabled only when both
Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.

This feature also prevents users from
changing the Default settings of the machine
by limiting access to the MENU settings.
Before using the security features you must
first enter an administrator password.
Access to restricted operations can be
enabled by creating a restricted user.
Restricted users must enter a user password
to use the machine.
Make a careful note of your password. If you
forget it, you will have to reset the password
stored in the machine. For information about
how to reset the password call Brother
Customer Service.

Chapter 2

Setting and changing the
Administrator Password

Changing the password

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.

d
e
f

Press Function Lock.

Enter a four-digit number for the new
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Re-enter the password when the LCD
shows Verify.
Press OK.

Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.

Press Stop/Exit.

d
e

Press Function Lock.

Re-enter the password when the LCD
shows Verify.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Setting up the password
The password you set in these steps is for the
administrator. This password is used to set
up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on
or off. (See Setting up and changing
restricted users on page 9 and Turning
Secure Function Lock on/off on page 11.)

Note
Make a careful note of the administrator
password. If you enter the wrong
password, the LCD will show
Wrong Password. Re-enter the correct
password. If you forget it, please call
Brother Customer Service.

a
b

Press MENU.

Enter a four-digit number for the
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press Set Password.
Enter the registered four-digit password
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Security features

Setting up and changing the
Public user mode
Public user mode restricts the functions that
are available for Public users. Public users do
not need to enter a password to access the
features made available through this setting.
You can set up one Public user.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.

d
e
f

Press Function Lock.

g
h

Enter the administrator password by
pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Press a or b to display Public.
Press Public.

Setting up restricted users

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.

d
e
f

Press Function Lock.

Press a or b to display User01.
Press User01.

Enter the user name by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen. (See
Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic
User's Guide.)
Press OK.

Enter a four-digit user password by
pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Do one of the following:

 To change the Public user settings,
pressa or b to display the setting you
want to change. Press the setting
and press Enable or Disable.
Repeat this step until you finish
changing settings.

You can set up users with restrictions and a
password for functions that are available to
them. You can set up more advanced
restrictions, such as by page count or PC
user login name, through Web Based
Management. (For more information, see the
Network User's Guide.) You can set up to 25
restricted users with restrictions and a
password.

Press Setup ID.

 To set up the Public user, press
Enable or Disable for each
operation, as follows: Press Fax Tx.
Then press Enable or Disable.
After you have set Fax Tx, repeat
these steps for Fax Rx, Copy,
Scan, Direct Print, Print and
Color Print.

Setting up and changing
restricted users

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press Setup ID.
Enter the four-digit administrator
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 2

To set up a restricted user, press
Enable or Disable for each operation,
as follows: Press Fax Tx. Then press
Enable or Disable. After you have set
Fax Tx, repeat these steps for
Fax Rx, Copy, Scan, Direct Print,
Print and Color Print.

Repeat steps g to j for entering each
additional user and password.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

To change the password, enter a new
four-digit user password by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.

To change a restricted user's settings,
press a or b to display the setting you
want to change. Press the setting and
then press Enable or Disable.
Repeat this step until you are finished
making changes.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

You cannot use the same name as
another user's name.

Changing user name, password or
settings for restricted users

You cannot use the same name as
another user's name.

Reset existing restricted users

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.

d
e
f

Press Function Lock.

d
e
f

Press Function Lock.

Press a or b to display the existing
restricted user you want to change.
Press the user name.

Press a or b to display the existing
restricted user you want to reset.
Press the user name.

Press Change.
To change the user name, enter a new
user name by pressing the buttons on
the Touchscreen. (See Entering text in
Appendix C of the Basic User's Guide.)
Press OK.

h
i

Press Reset.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press Setup ID.
Enter the four-digit administrator
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Press Yes to reset the existing restricted
user.

Security features

Turning Secure Function
Lock on/off
Turning Secure Function Lock on

a
b
c
d
e
f

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
Press Function Lock.

Turning Secure Function Lock off
2

Press Public or xxxxx (where xxxxx is
the user’s name).

b
c

Press Lock OniOff.
Enter the registered four-digit
administrator password by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Note
If you enter the wrong password, the LCD
will show Wrong Password. Re-enter
the correct password.

Press Lock OffiOn.
Enter the registered four-digit
administrator password by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Chapter 2

Switching Users
This setting allows you to switch between
registered restricted users or Public mode
when Secure Function Lock is turned on.

Changing to the Public Mode

Press xxxxx. (where xxxxx is the user’s
name.)

Press Go to Public.

Changing to the restricted user Mode

Press Public or xxxxx (where xxxxx is
the user’s name).
Press Change User.

b
c
d

Press a or b to display your user name.
Press your user name.
Enter the registered four-digit user
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Note
• After a restricted user has finished using
the machine, it will return to the Public
setting within the same time as the Mode
Timer setting. (See Mode Timer
on page 6.)
• If your ID has set page limit restrictions
and already reached the maximum
number of pages, the LCD will show
Limit Exceeded when you print data.
Contact your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.
• If your ID has set Color Print restrictions to
Disable, the LCD will show
No Permission when you try to print
colored data. The machine prints the data
in black & white only.

Security features

Setting Lock
Setting Lock lets you set a password to stop
other people from accidentally changing your
machine settings.
Make a careful note of your password. If you
forget it, you will have to reset the passwords
stored in the machine. Please call your
administrator or Brother Customer Service.
While Setting Lock is On, you cannot access
MENU and Address Book settings.
Also, machine settings cannot be changed
through the Remote Setup utility while Setting
Lock is On.

Setting up the password

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.

d
e

Press Setting Lock.

Re-enter the password when the LCD
shows Verify.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Enter a four-digit number for the
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Chapter 2

Changing your Setting Lock
password

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.

d
e
f

Press Setting Lock.
Press Set Password.
Enter the registered four-digit password
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Enter a four-digit number for the new
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Re-enter the password when the LCD
shows Verify.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Turning Setting Lock on/off
2

If you enter the wrong password when
following the instructions below, the LCD will
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the
correct password.
Turning Setting Lock on

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.

d
e
f

Press Setting Lock.

Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.

Press Lock OffiOn.
Enter the registered four-digit
administrator password by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Turning Setting Lock off

a
b

Press Setting Lock on the LCD.
Enter the registered four-digit
administrator password by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Security features

Restricting dialing

a
b

This feature is to prevent users from sending
a fax or call to a wrong number by mistake.
You can set the machine to restrict dialing by
using the dial pad, One Touch and Speed
Dial.
If you choose Off, the machine does not
restrict the dialing method.
If you choose Enter # twice, the machine
will prompt you to re-enter the number, and
then if you re-enter the same number
correctly, the machine will start dialing. If you
re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will
show an error message.
If you choose On, the machine will restrict all
fax sending and outbound calls for that
dialing method.

Dial pad restriction

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Dial Restrict.
Press Dial Restrict.

d
e
f

One Touch restriction

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press a or b to display
Dial Restrict.
Press Dial Restrict.

d
e
f

Press One Touch Dial.

Press Off, Enter # twice or On.
Press Stop/Exit.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Dial Restrict.
Press Dial Restrict.

d
e
f

Press Speed Dial.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Dial Pad.

Press MENU.

Speed Dial restriction

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Off, Enter # twice or On.
Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 2

LDAP server restriction

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Dial Restrict.
Press Dial Restrict.

d
e
f

Press LDAP server.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Off, Enter # twice or On.
Press Stop/Exit.

Note
• The Enter # twice setting will not work
if you use an external phone or press
Hook before entering the number. You will
not be asked to re-enter the number.
• You can not restrict dialing when you use
Redial/Pause.
• If you chose On or Enter # twice, you
cannot use the Broadcasting feature and
cannot combine quick dial numbers when
dialing.

Sending a fax

Additional sending
options
Sending faxes using multiple
settings
Before you send a fax, you can change any
combination of these settings: duplex fax,
contrast, resolution, overseas mode, delayed
fax timer, polling transmission, real time
transmission, broadcast, glass scan size or
cover page settings.

You need to choose the duplex scanning
format before you send a 2-sided fax. The
format you choose will depend on the layout
of your 2-sided document.

a
b

Press

Do one of the following:

(FAX).

Press d or c to display Duplex Fax.
Press Duplex Fax.

 If your document is flipped on the
Long edge, press
DuplexScan :LongEdge.
Long edge

Duplex Fax

Fax
Resolution

Off

Standard

Address Book

Changing a 2-sided fax layout

Press
(FAX).
The LCD shows:

FAX

Portrait

Press d or c to display a setting you
want to change and press the setting,
then press the option you want.

 If your document is flipped on the
Short edge, press
DuplexScan :ShortEdge.

Do one of the following:
 Repeat step b to change more
settings.
 If you are finished choosing settings,
go to the next step for sending your
fax.

Landscape

Short edge
Portrait

Landscape

Note
• Most settings are temporary and the
machine returns to its default settings after
you send a fax.

Press Stop/Exit.

• You can save some of the settings you
use most often by setting them as the
default. These settings will stay until you
change them again. (See Setting your
changes as the new default on page 24.)

Chapter 3

Contrast

For most documents the default setting of
Auto will give the best results.
Auto automatically chooses the suitable
contrast for your document.
If your document is very light or very dark,
changing the contrast may improve the
quality of the fax.
Use Dark to make the faxed document
lighter.
Use Light to make the faxed document
darker.

a
b

Press

Press Auto, Light or Dark.

(FAX).

Press d or c to display Contrast.
Press Contrast.

Note
Even if you choose Light or Dark, the
machine will send the fax using the Auto
setting if you choose Photo as the Fax
Resolution.

Changing Fax Resolution
The quality of a fax can be improved by
changing the Fax Resolution. Resolution can
be changed for the next fax.

a
b

Press

Press Standard, Fine, S.Fine or
Photo.

(FAX).

Press d or c to display
Fax Resolution.
Press Fax Resolution.

Note
You can choose four different resolution
settings for black & white faxes and two for
colour.
Black & white
Standard

Suitable for most typed
documents.

Fine

Good for small print and
transmits a little slower than
Standard resolution.

S.Fine

Good for small print or artwork
and transmits slower than Fine
resolution.

Photo

Use when the document has
varying shades of grey or is a
photograph. This has the
slowest transmission time.

Color
Standard

Suitable for most typed
documents.

Fine

Use when the document is a
photograph. The transmission
time is slower than Standard
resolution.

If you choose S.Fine or Photo and then
use the Color Start key to send a fax, the
machine will send the fax using the Fine
setting.

Sending a fax

Additional sending
operations
Sending a fax manually
Manual transmission
Manual transmission lets you hear the
dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while
sending a fax.

a
b
c
d
e

Make sure you are in Fax mode
(FAX).
Load your document.
Press Hook and listen for a dial tone.
Or pick up the handset of the external
telephone and listen for a dial tone.
Dial the fax number you want to call.

Sending a fax at the end of a
conversation

At the end of a conversation you can send a
fax to the other party before you both hang
up.

Ask the other party to wait for fax tones
(beeps) and then to press the Start or
Send key before hanging up.

Make sure you are in Fax mode
(FAX).

c
d

Load your document.
Press Black Start or Color Start.
 If you are using the scanner glass,
press Send.

Replace the handset of an external
telephone.

When you hear the fax tones, press
Black Start or Color Start.
 If you are using the scanner glass,
press Send.

Replace the handset of an external
telephone.

Chapter 3

Dual access
(black & white only)

Broadcasting
(black & white only)

You can dial a number, and start scanning the
fax into memory—even when the machine is
sending from memory, receiving faxes or
printing PC data. The LCD will show the new
job number.

Broadcasting lets you send the same fax
message to more than one fax number. You
can include Groups, One Touch, Speed Dial
numbers and up to 50 manually dialed
numbers in the same broadcast.

The number of pages you can scan into the
memory will vary depending on the data that
is printed on them.

You can broadcast up to 390 different
numbers. This will depend on how many
groups, access codes or credit card numbers
you have stored, and on how many delayed
or stored faxes in memory.

Note
If you get an Out of Memory message
while scanning the first page of a fax,
press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you
get an Out of Memory message while
scanning a subsequent page, you can
press Black Start to send the pages
scanned so far, or press Stop/Exit to
cancel the operation.

Before you begin the broadcast
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers must be
stored in the machine's memory before they
can be used in a broadcast. (See Storing One
Touch Dial numbers and Storing Speed Dial
numbers in Chapter 7 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
Group numbers must also be stored in the
machine's memory before they can be used
in a broadcast. Group numbers include many
stored One Touch Dial and Speed Dial
numbers for easier dialing. (See Setting up
Groups for Broadcasting on page 44.)

Sending a fax

How to broadcast a fax

Note
To help you choose numbers easily, press
Address Book or
(Search).

a
b
c

Press

You can add numbers to the broadcast
in the following ways:

(FAX).

Canceling a Broadcast in progress
While broadcasting you can cancel the fax
currently being sent or the whole broadcast
job.

a
b

Load your document.

Press OK.

Note

Do one of the following:

 To cancel the current job, press the
button that displays the number
being dialed. Go to step d.
 To exit without canceling, press
Stop/Exit.

Press OK.
 Press Address Book. Press
to search by Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. Put a check in the
check box beside each number you
want to include in the broadcast.

PressStop/Exit.

 To cancel the entire broadcast, press
Entire Broadcast. Go to step c.

Press d or c to display Broadcasting.
Press Broadcasting.

 Press Manual and enter a number
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen. (See How to dial in
Chapter 7 of the Basic User's Guide.)

When the LCD asks if you want to
cancel the entire broadcast, do one of
the following:
 Press Yes to confirm.
 To exit without canceling, press No
or Stop/Exit.

Do one of the following:
 To cancel the current job, press Yes.
 To exit without canceling, press No
or Stop/Exit.

One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.
Speed Dial numbers begin with #.

After you have entered all the fax
numbers by repeating step d, press OK.

Press Black Start.

After the broadcast is finished the machine
will print a broadcast report to let you know
the results.

Note
The scan profile of the One Touch,
Speed Dial or Group number you chose
first will be applied to the broadcast.

Chapter 3

Real Time Transmission

When you are sending a fax, the machine will
scan the documents into the memory before
sending it. Then, as soon as the telephone
line is free, the machine will start dialing and
sending.
Sometimes, you may want to send an
important document immediately, without
waiting for memory transmission. You can
turn on Real Time TX.

Note
• If the memory is full and you are sending a
black and white fax from the ADF, the
machine will send the document in real
time (even if Real Time TX is set to Off). If
the memory is full, faxes from the scanner
glass cannot be sent until you clear some
of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic
redial feature does not work when using
the scanner glass.

a
b
c

Press

Press On.

(FAX).

Load your document.
Press d or c to display Real Time TX.
Press Real Time TX.

Overseas Mode
If you are having difficulty sending a fax
overseas due to a bad connection, then
turning on Overseas Mode may help.
This is a temporary setting, and will only be
active for your next fax.

a
b
c

Press

Press On.

(FAX).

Load your document.
Press d or c to display
Overseas Mode.
Press Overseas Mode.

Delayed Fax
(black & white only)
You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory
to be sent within a twenty-four hour period.

a
b
c

Press

d
e

Press On.

(FAX).

Load your document.
Press d or c to display Delayed Fax.
Press Delayed Fax.

Enter the time you want the fax to be
sent (in 24-hour format) by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen. (For
example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Press OK.

Note
The number of pages you can scan into
the memory depends on the amount of
data printed on each page.

Sending a fax

Delayed batch transmission
(black & white only)
Before sending the delayed faxes, your
machine will help you economize by sorting
all the faxes in the memory by destination and
scheduled time.
All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be
sent at the same time to the same fax number
will be sent as one fax to save transmission
time.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Setup Send.
Press Setup Send.

d
e
f

Press Batch TX.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Checking and canceling
waiting jobs
Check which jobs are still waiting in the
memory to be sent. If there are no jobs, the
LCD will show No Jobs Waiting. You can
cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in
the memory.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Remaining Jobs.
Press Remaining Jobs.
Jobs that are waiting will appear on the
LCD.

Press a or b to scroll through the jobs
and press the job you want to cancel.
Press OK.

Do one of the following:

Press On or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

 To cancel, press Yes. If you want to
cancel another job repeat step d.
 To exit without canceling, press No.

When you have finished canceling jobs,
press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 3

Setting your changes as the
new default
You can save the fax settings for
Fax Resolution, Contrast,
Real Time TX, Glass Scan Size and
Coverpage Setup you use most often by
setting them as the default. These settings
will stay until you change them again.

a
b

Press

Press d or c to choose the setting you
want to change, and then press the new
option.
Repeat this step for each setting you
want to change.
After changing the last setting,
press d or c to display
Set New Default.
Press Set New Default.

d
e

Press Yes.
Press Stop/Exit.

You can restore all the fax settings you have
changed to the factory settings. These
settings will stay until you change them again.

a
b

Press

c
d

Press Yes.

(FAX).

Restoring all fax settings to
the factory settings

(FAX).

After changing the last setting,
press d or c to display
Factory Reset.
Press Factory Reset.

Press Stop/Exit.

Sending a fax

Electronic cover page
(black & white only)
This feature will not work unless you have
already programmed your Station ID. (See
the Quick Setup Guide.)
You can automatically send a cover page
with every fax. Your cover page includes your
Station ID, a comment, and the name (or
number) stored in the One Touch or Speed
Dial memory.
By choosing On you can also display the
number of pages on the cover page.
You can choose one of the following preset
comments.

Composing your own comments
3

You can set up two comments of your own.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Setup Send.
Press Setup Send.

d
e
f
g

Press Coverpage Setting.

1.Comment Off
2.Please Call

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Coverpage Message.
Press 5 or 6 to store your own comment.
Enter your own comment by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Press
to choose numbers, letters or
special characters. (Use the chart for
Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic
User's Guide for help entering
characters.)

3.Urgent
4.Confidential
Instead of using one of the preset comments,
you can enter two personal messages of your
own, up to 27 characters long. Use the chart
for Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic
User's Guide for help entering characters.

Press Stop/Exit.

(See Composing your own comments
on page 25.)
5.(User Defined)
6.(User Defined)

Chapter 3

Send a cover page for all faxes
You can set the machine to send a cover
page whenever you send a fax.

a
b
c
d
e

Press

(FAX).

Press d or c to display
Coverpage Setup.
Press Coverpage Setup.
Press On (or Off).
Press the comment you want to add.
Enter two digits to show the number of
pages you are sending.
Press OK.
For example, enter 0 2 for 2 pages or
0 0 to leave the number of pages blank.
If you make a mistake, press Clear to
back up and re-enter the number of
pages.

Using a printed cover page
If you want to use a printed cover page that
you can write on, you can print the sample
page and attach it to your fax.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Setup Send.
Press Setup Send.

d
e
f
g

Press Coverpage Setting.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Print Sample.
Press Black Start or Color Start.
After the machine prints a copy of your
cover page, press Stop/Exit.

Sending a fax

Polling overview

Polling lets you set up your machine so other
people can receive faxes from you, but they
pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody
else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,
so you pay for the call. The polling feature
needs to be set up on both machines for this
to work. Not all fax machines support polling.

Polled transmit
(black & white only)

Note
The document will be stored and can be
retrieved from any other fax machine until
you delete the fax from memory.
To delete the fax from memory, press
MENU, Fax, Remaining Jobs. (See
Checking and canceling waiting jobs
on page 23.)

Polled transmit lets you set up your machine
to wait with a document so another fax
machine can call and retrieve it.

Setup for polled transmit

a
b
c

Press

d
e
f

Press On.

(FAX).

Load your document.
Press d or c to display Polled TX.
Press Polled TX.

Press Black Start.
If you are using the scanner glass, the
LCD will prompt you to choose one of
the following options:
 Press Yes to scan another page.
Go to step g.
 Press No or Black Start to send the
document.

Place the next page on the scanner
glass and press Black Start. Repeat
steps f and g for each additional
page.

Your machine will automatically send
the fax.

Receiving a fax

Remote Fax Options
(black & white only)

Fax Forwarding
4

Remote Fax Options are NOT available for
color faxes.
Remote Fax Options let you receive faxes
while you are away from the machine.
You can use only one Remote Fax Option at
a time.

Receiving faxes into memory
when the paper tray is empty
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty
during fax reception, the LCD shows
No Paper and begins receiving faxes into
the machine’s memory. Put some paper in
the paper tray. (See Loading paper and print
media in Chapter 2 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
The machine will carry on receiving the fax,
with the remaining pages being stored in
memory, if enough memory is available.
Incoming faxes will continue to be stored in
the memory until the memory becomes full or
paper is loaded in the paper tray. When the
memory is full the machine will stop
automatically answering calls. To print the
faxes, put fresh paper in the tray.

The Fax Forwarding feature lets you
automatically forward your received faxes to
another machine.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display
Forward/Page/Store.
Press Forward/Page/Store.

e
f

Press Fax Forward.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Do one of the followings:
 Press Manual to enter the
forwarding fax number (up to 20
characters) or E-mail address (up to
60 characters) using the buttons on
the Touchscreen. (See Entering text
in Appendix C of the Basic User's
Guide.)
Press OK.
 Press Address Book.
Press a or b to scroll until you find the
fax number or E-mail address you
want your faxes to be forward to.
Press the fax number or E-mail
address you want to use.

Receiving a fax

Note
• You can enter an E-mail address by
pressing
on the Touchscreen.

Paging

• You can display your stored numbers and
E-mail addresses in alphabetical order by
pressing
on the Touchscreen.

When Paging is chosen, the machine dials
the cell phone or pager number you
programmed. This activates your cell phone
or pager so you will know that you have a fax
message in the machine’s memory.

• You cannot enter a forwarding number
using a One Touch key on the control
panel.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

• Depending on the E-mail address you
choose, you will be asked for the File
Type. Choose TIFF or PDF and go to
step g.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

• If you choose a Group number from the
Address Book, the faxes will be forwarded
to multiple fax numbers.

Press a or b to display
Forward/Page/Store.
Press Forward/Page/Store.

e
f

Press Paging.

Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.

IMPORTANT
If you choose Backup Print On, the
machine will also print received faxes at
your machine so you will have a copy.
This is a safety feature in case there is a
power failure before the fax is forwarded
or a problem at the receiving machine.

g
h

Press Stop/Exit.

Enter your cell phone number followed
by # # (up to 20 digits) by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Do not include the area code if it is the
same as that of your machine.
For example, press
18005551234##.
Do one of the following:
 If you pager needs a PIN, enter the
PIN, press #, press Pause, enter
your fax number followed by ##.
Press OK. (For example, press:
1 2 3 4 5 # Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7
8 9 # #)
 If you do not need a PIN, press OK.
 If you are programming a cell phone
number, press OK.

Chapter 4

Press Stop/Exit.

Fax Storage

Note

The Fax Storage feature lets you store your
received faxes in the machine’s memory. You
can retrieve stored fax messages from a fax
machine at another location using the remote
retrieval commands. (See Retrieving fax
messages on page 34.) Your machine will
automatically print a copy of the stored fax.

• If you have set Paging, a backup copy will
automatically be printed at the machine.
• You cannot change a Paging or PIN
number remotely.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display
Forward/Page/Store.
Press Forward/Page/Store.

e
f

Press Fax Storage.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Stop/Exit.

Receiving a fax

PC-Fax Receive

If you turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature
your machine will store received faxes in
memory and send them to your PC
automatically. You can then use your PC to
view and store these faxes.
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night
or on the weekend, for example), your
machine will receive and store your faxes in
its memory. The number of received faxes
that are stored in the memory will appear on
the LCD.
When you start your PC and the PC-Fax
Receiving software runs, your machine
transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.
For PC-Fax Receive to work you must have
the PC-FAX Receive software running on
your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX Receiving
in the Software User's Guide.)
If you choose Backup Print On, the machine
will also print the fax.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display
Forward/Page/Store.
Press Forward/Page/Store.

e
f

Press PC Fax Receive.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

The LCD gives you options that you
have set up in the PC-Fax receiving
program on your PC. If you started the
PC-FAX Receiving program on your
computer, press OK. (See PC-FAX
Receiving in the Software User's
Guide.)

Press a or b to choose or your
computer name if the machine is
connected to a network.
Press OK.

Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.

Press Stop/Exit.

IMPORTANT
If you choose Backup Print On, the
machine will also print the fax at your
machine so you will have a copy. This is a
safety feature in case there is a power
failure before the fax is forwarded or a
problem at the receiving machine.

Note
• Before you can set up PC-Fax Receive
you must install the MFL-Pro Suite
software on your PC. Make sure your PC
is connected and turned on. (For details
see PC-FAX Receiving in the Software
User's Guide.)
• If your machine has a problem and is
unable to print faxes in memory, you can
use this setting to transfer your faxes to a
PC. (For details, see Transferring your
faxes or Fax Journal report in Appendix B
of the Basic User's Guide.)
• PC-Fax Receive is not supported in
Mac OS.
• Even if you have turned on the PC-Fax
Receive feature, color faxes will not be
transferred to your PC. The machine
prints received color faxes.

Chapter 4

Changing Remote Fax
Options
If received faxes are left in your machine’s
memory when you change to another
Remote Fax Option, the LCD will ask you one
of the following questions:
 Erase All Fax?

IMPORTANT
4

If you choose Backup Print On, the
machine will also print received faxes at
your machine so you will have a copy.
This is a safety feature in case there is a
power failure before the fax is forwarded
or a problem at the receiving machine.

 Print All Fax?
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory
will be erased or printed before the
setting changes. If a backup copy has
already been printed it will not be
printed again.
• If you press No, faxes in the memory
will not be erased or printed and the
setting will be unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine’s
memory when you change to
PC Fax Receive from another remote fax
option (Fax Forward, Paging or
Fax Storage), the LCD will ask you the
following question:

Turning off Remote Fax Options

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display
Forward/Page/Store.
Press Forward/Page/Store.

Press Off.

 Send Fax to PC?
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory
will be sent to your PC before the
setting changes. Faxes in the memory
will be sent to your PC when the
PC-Fax Receive icon is active on your
PC. (See the Software User's Guide.)
• If you press No, faxes in the memory
will not be erased or transferred to your
PC and the setting will be unchanged.
 Backup Print:On
Backup Print:Off
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Note
The LCD will give you more options if
there are received faxes still in your
machine’s memory. (See Changing
Remote Fax Options on page 32.)

Press Stop/Exit.

Receiving a fax

Remote retrieval

The remote retrieval feature lets you retrieve
your stored fax messages when you are not
at the machine. You can call your machine
from any touch tone telephone or fax
machine, then use the Remote Access Code
to retrieve your messages.

Setting a Remote Access Code

Using your Remote Access Code

Dial your fax number from a telephone
or another fax machine using touch
tone.

When your machine answers,
immediately enter your Remote Access
Code (3 digits followed by l).

The machine signals if it has received
messages:

The Remote Access Code feature lets you
access the remote retrieval features when
you are away from your machine. Before you
use the remote access and retrieval features,
you have to set up your own code. The
default code is an inactive code: – – –l.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Remote Access.
Press Remote Access.

Enter a three-digit code using the
numbers 0 – 9, l or #.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

 No beeps
No messages received.
 1 long beep
Fax message received.

The machine gives two short beeps to
tell you to enter a command (See
Remote fax commands on page 35).
The machine will hang up if you wait
longer than 30 seconds before entering
a command. If you enter an invalid
command the machine will beep three
times.

Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you
have finished.

Hang up.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Note
DO NOT use the same code used for your
Fax Receive Code (l51) or Telephone
Answer Code (#51). (See Using Remote
Codes in Chapter 6 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
You can change your code at any time. If you
want to make your code inactive, press
Clear and then OK in d to restore the
inactive setting – – –l.

Note
If your machine is set to Manual mode,
you can still access the remote retrieval
features. Dial the fax number as normal
and let the machine ring. After
100 seconds you will hear a long beep to
tell you to enter the remote access code.
You will then have 30 seconds to enter the
code.

Chapter 4

Retrieving fax messages

Dial your fax number from a telephone
or another fax machine using touch
tone.

When your machine answers,
immediately enter your Remote Access
Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear
one long beep, you have messages.

When you hear two short beeps, use the
dial pad to press 9 6 2.

Wait for a long beep, and then use the
dial pad to enter the number of the
remote fax machine where you want
your fax messages sent, followed by ##
(up to 20 digits).

Hang up after you hear your machine
beep. Your machine will call the other
machine, which will then print your fax
messages.

Changing the Fax Forwarding number
You can change the default setting of your fax
forwarding number from another telephone or
fax machine using touch tone.

Dial your fax number from a telephone
or another fax machine using touch
tone.

When your machine answers,
immediately enter your Remote Access
Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear
one long beep, you have messages.

When you hear two short beeps, use the
dial pad to press 9 5 4.

Wait for a long beep, and then use the
dial pad to enter the new number of the
remote fax machine where you want
your fax messages forwarded followed
by ## (up to 20 digits).

Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you
have finished.

Hang up after you hear your machine
beep.

Note
You can insert a pause in a fax number by
using the # key.

Receiving a fax

Remote fax commands

Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you
call the machine and enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by l), the system will give
two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.
Remote commands
95

Change the fax forwarding,
paging or fax storage settings
1 OFF

You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all your
messages.

2 Fax Forwarding

One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three
short beeps, you cannot make the change because something
has not been set up (for example, a fax forwarding or paging
number has not been registered). You can register your fax
forwarding number by entering 4. (See Changing the Fax
Forwarding number on page 34.) Once you have registered the
number, fax forwarding will work.

3 Paging
4 Fax Forwarding number
6 Fax Storage

Retrieve a fax
2 Retrieve all faxes

Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax
messages. (See Retrieving fax messages on page 34.)

3 Erase faxes from the memory

If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased
from the memory.

Check the receiving status
1 Fax

Operation details

You can check whether your machine has received any faxes.
If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three
short beeps.

Change the Receive Mode
1 External TAD

If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.

2 Fax/Tel
3 Fax Only
90

Exit

Press 9 0 to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then
replace the handset.

Chapter 4

Additional receiving
operations
Printing a reduced incoming
fax
If you choose On, the machine automatically
reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on
one page of A4, Letter, Legal or Folio size
paper.
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by
using the page size of the fax and your Paper
Size setting (MENU, General Setup,
Tray Setting, Tray Use:Fax). See
Paper Size and Type in Chapter 2 of the
Basic User's Guide.

a
b
c

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display
Auto Reduction.
Press Auto Reduction.

e
f

Press On (or Off).

Press Stop/Exit.

Duplex (2-sided) printing for
Fax mode
4

Your machine can automatically print
received faxes onto both sides of the paper
when Duplex is set to On.
4

You can use Letter, Legal or Folio
(8.5 in. × 13 in.) size paper for this function
[16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)]

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display Duplex.
Press Duplex.

e
f

Press On (or Off).

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
• When Duplex is turned on incoming faxes
will automatically be reduced to fit the size
of paper in the paper tray.
• When Duplex is set to On, the LCD
displays 1 2 (Duplex icon).

Receiving a fax

Setting the Fax Receive
Stamp (black & white only)

Receiving a fax at the end of a
conversation

You can set the machine to print the received
date and time in the top center of each
received fax page.

At the end of a conversation you can ask the
other party to send you a fax before you both
hang up.

a
b

Press MENU.

Ask the other party to place the
document in their machine and to press
the Start or Send key.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

When you hear the CNG tones (slowly
repeating beeps), press Black Start or
Color Start.

Press a or b to display Fax Rx Stamp.
Press Fax Rx Stamp.

c
d

Press Receive to receive a fax.

e
f

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Replace the external handset.

Press On or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.

Note
• The received time and date will not appear
when using Internet Fax.
• Make sure you have set the current date
and time in the machine. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.)

Chapter 4

Setting the Print Density
You can adjust the Print Density setting to
make your printed pages darker or lighter.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press a or b to display
Print Density.
Press Print Density.

Press c to make the print darker.
Or, press d to make the print lighter.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Printing a fax from the
memory
If you are using the Fax Storage feature
(MENU, Fax, Setup Receive,
Forward/Page/Store), you can still print a
fax from the memory when you are at your
machine. (See Fax Storage on page 30.)

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display Print Fax.
Press Print Fax.

d
e

Press Black Start.

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Press Stop/Exit.

Receiving a fax

Polling overview

 Press Manual and enter a number
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.

Polling receive

Press

c
d

Press OK.
 Press Address Book. Press
to choose Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. Press a or b to
select a number.
Press OK.

Note

Polling receive lets you call another fax
machine to receive a fax.

a
b

Do one of the following:

One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.
Speed Dial numbers begin with #.

(FAX).

After you have entered all the fax
numbers by repeating step e, press OK.

Press On.

Enter the fax number you are polling
using One Touch, Speed Dial, or the dial
pad. Press Black Start or Color Start.

Press Black Start.
The machine polls each number or
Group number in turn for a document.

Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing
to cancel the polling process.

Press d or c to display Polling RX.
Press Polling RX.

Sequential polling

Sequential polling lets you request
documents from several fax machines in one
operation. Afterwards, a Sequential Polling
Report will be printed.

To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,
see Canceling a Sequential Polling Job
on page 39.

Canceling a Sequential Polling Job

a
b

Press Stop/Exit.

a
b

Press

c
d

Press On.

 To cancel the entire sequential
polling job, press
Entire Seq. Poll. Go to step c.

Press d or c to display Broadcasting.
Press Broadcasting.

 To cancel the current job, press the
button that displays the number
being dialed. Go to step d.

(FAX).

Press d or c to display Polling RX.
Press Polling RX.

Do one of the following:

 To exit without canceling, press
Stop/Exit.

Chapter 4

When the LCD asks if you want to
cancel the entire sequential polling job,
do one of the following:
 Press Yes to confirm.
 To exit without canceling, press No
or Stop/Exit.

Do one of the following:
 To cancel the current job, press Yes.
 To exit without canceling, press No
or Stop/Exit.

Dialing and storing numbers

Telephone line
services
Tone or Pulse (Canada only)

Special line considerations

Pick up the handset of the external
telephone or press Hook.

Press # on the machine’s control panel.
Any digits dialed after this will send tone
signals.
When you hang up, the machine will
return to the Pulse dialing service.

For Fax/Tel mode only

Roll over telephone lines
5

If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need
to send Tone signals (for example, for
telephone banking), follow the instructions
below. If you have Touch Tone service, you
will not need this feature to send tone signals.

A roll over telephone system is a group of two
or more separate telephone lines that pass
incoming calls to each other if they are busy.
The calls are usually passed down or “rolled
over” to the next available telephone line in a
preset order.
Your machine can work in a roll over system
as long as it is the last number in the
sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not
put the machine on any of the other numbers;
when the other lines are busy and a second
fax call is received, the fax call would be
transferred to a line that does not have a fax
machine. Your machine will work best on a
dedicated line.

Two-line telephone system

When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will
use the F/T Ring Time
(pseudo/double-ringing) to alert you to pick
up a voice call.
Lift the external telephone’s handset, and
then press Hook to answer.
If you are at an extension telephone, you will
need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring
Time and then press #51 between the
pseudo/double rings. If no one is on the line,
or if someone wants to send you a fax, send
the call back to the machine by pressing l51.

A two-line telephone system is nothing more
than two separate telephone numbers on the
same wall outlet. The two telephone numbers
can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or combined
into one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be
plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14
jacks may be equal in size and appearance
and both may contain four wires (black, red,
green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in
a two-line telephone and see if it can access
both lines. If it can, you must separate the line
for your machine.

Converting telephone wall outlets

There are three ways to convert to an RJ11
jack. The first two ways may require
assistance from the telephone company. You
can change the wall outlets from one RJ14
jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an
RJ11 wall outlet installed and slave or jump
one of the telephone numbers to it.

Chapter 5

The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex
adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into
an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two
separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a
third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your
machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into
L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on
Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triplex adapter.

Plug one end of the second telephone
line cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of
the two-line TAD. Plug the other end into
the EXT. jack on the left side of the
machine.

RJ14

3
RJ11

Triplex Adapter

RJ14

Two Line Telephone

Installing machine, external two-line
TAD and two-line telephone

When you are installing an external two-line
telephone answering device (TAD) and a
two-line telephone, your machine must be
isolated on one line at both the wall jack and
at the TAD. The most common connection is
to put the machine on Line 2, which is
explained in the following steps. The back of
the two-line TAD must have two telephone
jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other
labeled L2. You will need at least three
telephone line cords, the one that came with
your machine and two for your external
two-line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord
if you add a two-line telephone.

Put the two-line TAD and the two-line
telephone next to your machine.

Plug one end of the telephone line cord
for your machine into the L2 jack of the
triplex adapter. Plug the other end into
the LINE jack on the back of the
machine.

Plug one end of the first telephone line
cord for your TAD into the L1 jack of the
triplex adapter. Plug the other end into
the L1 or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.

External Two Line TAD

Machine

You can keep two-line telephones on other
wall outlets as always. There are two ways to
add a two-line telephone to the machine’s
wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line
cord from the two-line telephone into the
L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or, you can
plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack
of the two-line TAD.

Dialing and storing numbers

Additional dialing
operations
Dialing access codes and
credit card numbers

Sometimes you may want to choose from
several long distance carriers when you send
a fax. Rates may vary depending on the time
and destination. To take advantage of low
rates, you can store the access codes of long
distance carriers and credit card numbers as
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. You
can store these long dialing sequences by
dividing them and setting them up as
separate One Touch and Speed Dial
numbers in any combination. You can even
include manual dialing using the dial pad.
See Storing numbers in Chapter 7 of the
Basic User's Guide.

For example, you might have stored ‘555’ on
Speed Dial #003 and ‘7000’ on Speed Dial
#002. You can use them both to dial
‘555-7000’ if you press the following keys:
Press Address Book, #003 and
Send a fax.
Press Address Book, #002, Send a fax
and Black Start or Color Start.
Numbers can be added manually by entering
them on the dial pad:
Press Address Book, #003, Send a fax,
7001 (on the dial pad), and Black Start or
Color Start.
This would dial ‘555–7001’. You can also add
a pause by pressing Redial/Pause.

Chapter 5

Additional ways to
store numbers
Setting up Groups for
Broadcasting

Enter the Group name (up to 15
characters) by pressing the buttons on
the Touchscreen. Press
to choose
numbers, letters or special characters.
(Use the chart for Entering text in
Appendix C of the Basic User's Guide
for help entering characters.)
Press OK.

Do one of the following:

If you often want to send the same fax
message to many fax numbers you can set
up a Group.
Groups are stored on a One Touch key or a
Speed Dial number. Each Group uses up a
One Touch key or a Speed Dial location. You
can then send the fax message to all the
numbers stored in a Group just by pressing a
One Touch key or entering a Speed Dial
number, and then pressing Black Start.

 Press OK to accept the displayed
Group number.
 Enter a new Group number using the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.

Before you can add numbers to a Group, you
need to store them as One Touch or Speed
Dial numbers. You can have up to 20 small
Groups, or you can assign up to 339 numbers
to one large Group.

a
b
c
d

Press Address Book.
Press More.
Press Setup Groups.
Press Set Speed Dial or
Set One Touch Dial to choose
where you want to store the new Group.

Note
The machine automatically allocates an
available Speed Dial number or One
Touch Dial location to the new Group.

Do one of the following:
 Press OK to accept the displayed
One Touch or Speed Dial number.
 Enter a new number using the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.

To select the Registration Type (Dial
type) and the file type, press d or c to
display
Fax/IFAX,
E-Mail B&W PDF,
E-Mail B&W TIFF,
E-Mail Color PDF,
E-Mail Color JPEG,
E-Mail Color XPS,
E-Mail Gray PDF,
E-Mail Gray JPEG,
E-Mail Gray XPS.
Press the option you want.

Add One Touch or Speed Dial numbers
to the Group by pressing the check box
to display a red check mark.
If you want to list the numbers in
alphabetical order, press
.
Press OK.

Note
• One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.
Speed Dial numbers begin with #.
• If the stored Registration Type (Dial type)
of a One Touch Dial number or a Speed
Dial number is not compatible with the
Registration Type (Dial type) selected in
step h, the One Touch Dial number or
Speed Dial number will be dimmed on the
LCD.

Dialing and storing numbers

To choose the fax/scan resolution for
the Group number, go to the appropriate
next step as shown in the following
table.

Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF or Signed PDF that will
be used to send E-mail.

Note
Option selected in step h
Fax/IFAX
E-Mail B&W PDF

Go to step
k
l

If you choose Secure PDF, the machine
will ask you to enter a four-digit password
using numbers 0-9 before it starts
scanning.

E-Mail B&W TIFF
E-Mail Color PDF
E-Mail Color JPEG

E-Mail Color XPS

p
q

Press OK to confirm.
Press Stop/Exit.

E-Mail Gray PDF
E-Mail Gray JPEG

E-Mail Gray XPS

Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine, S.Fine 1 or Photo and go to
step p.
1

S.Fine is available if the Group is constituted
by only fax numbers.

Select the resolution from 200 dpi or
200 x 100 dpi.
 If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go
to step o.
 If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go
to step p.

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.
 If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,
go to step o.
 If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG
or E-Mail Color XPS, go to
step p.

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi or 300 dpi.
 If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go
to step o.
 If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or
E-Mail Gray XPS, go to step p.

Chapter 5

Options for Setting Up Groups

The following chart shows the selections for setting up Group numbers.
When you store numbers, the LCD instructs you to choose from the options shown in the following
steps.
Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

Enter
Group
Location

Enter
Group
Name

Enter
Name

Select
Registration
Type

Add Stored
One Touch
and Speed
Dial Numbers
to the Group

Select Resolution

Select File
Type

Fax Number or
E-mail
Address

Standard, Fine,

E-mail
Address

200 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi

PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF,
Signed PDF

E-Mail
B&W TIFF

200 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi

E-Mail
Color PDF

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi, 600 dpi

PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF,
Signed PDF

E-Mail
Color JPEG

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi, 600 dpi

E-Mail
Color XPS

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi, 600 dpi

E-Mail
Gray PDF

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi

PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF,
Signed PDF

E-Mail
Gray JPEG

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi

E-Mail
Gray XPS

100 dpi, 200 dpi,
300 dpi

(Dial Type)
One
Touch
or
Speed
Dial

(Name)
Press OK

(1 to 40) Fax/IFAX

E-Mail
B&W PDF

S.Fine

Photo

S.Fine does not appear if you add an E-mail address in step 5.

Note
• If you choose Signed PDF, you must install a certificate to your machine using Web Based
Management. Choose Configure Signed PDF Settings from Administrator Settings in Web
Based Management. For how to install a certificate, see the Network User's Guide.
• PDF/A is a PDF file format intended for long-term archiving. This format contains all the
necessary information to be able to reproduce the document after long-term storage.
• A Signed PDF helps prevent data tampering and the impersonation of an author by including
a digital certificate within the document.

Dialing and storing numbers

Changing Group numbers
You can change a Group number that has
already been stored. If the Group has a fax
forwarding number, it will be dimmed on the
LCD. You cannot select the number to make
changes.

Adding and deleting numbers in a Group

a
b
c
d

Press Address Book.

e
f

Press Add/Delete.

Press the check box of the number you
want to add to check it.
Press the check box of the number you
want to delete to uncheck it.
Press OK to confirm.

h
i

Press OK.

Changing a Group name, Resolution or
PDF type

a
b
c
d
e

Press Address Book.
Press More.
Press Change.
Press a or b to display the Group you
want to change.
Press the Group.
You can change the Group settings:
 If you chose Name, enter the name
(up to 15 characters) by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press More.
Press Change.
Press a or b to display the Group you
want to change.
Press the Group.

Press a or b to display the number you
want to add or delete.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press OK.
 If you chose Resolution, press one of
the available resolution options
displayed on the LCD.
 If you chose PDF type, press one of
the available file type options
displayed on the LCD.
The LCD will display your new setting.

Note
How to change the stored name or
number:
If you want to change a character, press
d or c to position the cursor under the
character you want to change, and then
press
. Re-enter the character.

When you are finished making changes
to the Group, press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.
47

Chapter 5

Deleting Group numbers
You can delete a Group number that has
already been stored. If a Group has a
scheduled job or fax forwarding number, it will
be dimmed on the LCD. You cannot select
the number to delete it.

a
b
c
d

Press Address Book.
Press More.
Press Delete.
Press a or b to display the Group you
want to delete.
Press the check box of the Group you
want to delete to check it.
Press OK.
Do one of the following:
 To Delete the Group, press Yes.
 To exit without deleting the Group,
press No.

Press Stop/Exit.

Printing reports

Fax reports

 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days
The machine will print the report at
the chosen time and then erase all
jobs from its memory.
If the machine's memory becomes
full with 200 jobs before the time you
chose has passed, the machine will
print the Journal early and then erase
all jobs from the memory. If you want
an extra report before it is due to
print, you can print it without erasing
the jobs from the memory.

You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. (For
details about how to set up the type of report
you want, see Transmission Verification
Report in Chapter 4 of the Basic User's
Guide.)

Fax Journal
You can set the machine to print a fax journal
(activity report) at specific intervals (every
50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). The
default setting is Every 50 Faxes, this
means that your machine will print the journal
when the machine has stored 50 jobs.

Press d or c to choose an interval

Some fax reports (transmission verification
and fax journal) can be printed automatically
and manually.

Transmission verification
report

 Every 50 Faxes
The machine will print the Journal
when the machine has stored 50
jobs.

Do one of the following:
 If you chose Every 50 Faxes
Go to step g.
 If you chose Every 6, 12, 24 hours or
2 Days

If you set the interval to Off, you can still print
the report by following the steps on the next
page.

Enter the time to start printing in
24-hour format. (For example: enter
19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

a
b

Press MENU.

Press OK.

Press a or b to display
Report Settings.
Press Report Settings.

 If you chose Every 7 Days

Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.

Enter the time to start printing in
24-hour format. (For example: enter
19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Press OK.
Press d or c to choose the day of the
week.

Press Journal Period.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 6

Reports
The following reports are available:
1 Transmission
Displays the Transmission Verification
Report for your last outgoing 200 faxes
and prints the last report.
2 Help List
Prints a list of commonly used functions to
help you program your machine.
3 Tel Index List

How to print a report

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display the report you
want to print.
Press the report you want to print.

Do one of the following:
 If you chose Transmission, press
Print Report.

Prints a list of names and numbers stored
in the One Touch and Speed Dial memory
in numerical or alphabetical order.

 If you chose Tel Index List,
press Numerical Order or
Alphabetical Order.

4 Fax Journal
Prints a list of information about your last
200 incoming and outgoing faxes.
(TX: transmit.) (RX: receive.)
5 User Settings
Print a list of your current settings.
6 Network Config
Lists your network settings.
7 Drum Dot Print
Prints the drum dot check sheet to
troubleshoot a dotted print problem.
8 WLAN Report
Prints the result of wireless LAN
connectivity diagnosis.

Press a or b to display
Print Reports.
Press Print Reports.

 If you chose other than
Transmission or
Tel Index List, go to e.

e
f

Press Black Start or Color Start.
Press Stop/Exit.

Making copies

Copy settings

 Auto

These settings are temporary, and the
machine returns to its default settings one
minute after copying, unless you have set the
Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less. (See
Mode Timer on page 6.)

Auto is the recommended mode for
ordinary printouts. Suitable for documents
that contain both text and photographs.
 Text

To change a setting, press
(COPY)
and then press d or c to scroll through the
copy settings. When the setting you want is
displayed, press the button.

Suitable for documents containing only
text.
 Photo
Suitable for copying photographs.

When you are finished choosing settings,
press Black Start or Color Start.

To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.

Improving copy quality
You can choose from a range of quality
settings. The default setting is Auto.

You can change the copy settings temporarily
for the next copy.

Stop copying

 Graph

Suitable for copying receipts.
7

a
b
c
d

Press

e
f

Press Auto, Text, Photo or Graph.

(COPY).

Load your document.
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Quality.
Press Quality.

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.

Chapter 7

Enlarging or reducing the
image copied
To enlarge or reduce the next copy follow the
instructions below:

a
b
c
d

Press

(COPY).

Load your document.
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display
Enlarge/Reduce.
Press Enlarge/Reduce.

Press 100%, Enlarge, Reduce or
Custom(25-400%).

Do one of the following:
 If you chose Enlarge or Reduce,
press the enlargement or reduction
ratio button you want.
 If you chose Custom(25-400%),
enter an enlargement or reduction
ratio from 25% to 400%.
Press OK.
 If you chose 100%, go to step g.

100%*
104% EXE i LTR
141% A5 i A4
200%
50%
70% A4 i A5
78% LGL i LTR
83% LGL i A4
85% LTR i EXE
91% Full Page
94% A4 i LTR
97% LTR i A4
Custom(25-400%)

g
7

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.

Note
Page Layout Options 2 in 1 (P), 2 in 1 (L),
2 in 1 (ID), 4 in 1 (P) and 4 in 1 (L) are not
available with Enlarge/Reduce.

Making copies

If you want to use the automatic duplex copy
feature, load your document in the ADF.
If you get an Out of Memory message while
you are making duplex copies, try installing
extra memory. (See Installing extra memory
on page 95.)
You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from
the following options before you can start
duplex copying. The layout of your document
determines which 2-sided copy layout you
should choose.

 2sidei1side Long Edge Flip
Portrait
1

1
2

Landscape
11

1
2

Duplex (2-sided) Copying

 1sidei2side Short Edge Flip

 2sidei2side

Portrait

Portrait
1

1
2

Landscape

Landscape
1

 1sidei2side Long Edge Flip

 2sidei1side Short Edge Flip

Portrait

Portrait
1
1

1
2

Landscape

1
2

a
b
c

Press

2
(COPY).

Load your document.
Enter the number of copies you want.

Chapter 7

Press d or c to display Duplex Copy.
Press Duplex Copy.

Press d or c to display the following
layout options:
2sidei2side,
1sidei2side LongEdgeFlip,
2sidei1side LongEdgeFlip,
1sidei2side ShortEdgeFlip,
2sidei1side ShortEdgeFlip,
Off

Adjusting Brightness and
Contrast
Brightness

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.

Tray selection
You can change the Tray Use option for the
next copy.

a
b
c
d
e

Press

Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Tray Use.
Press Tray Use.

Press d to make a darker copy or press
c to make a lighter copy.
Press OK.

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.

(COPY).

Load your document.
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Brightness.
Press Brightness.

Contrast

Adjust the contrast to help an image look
sharper and more vivid.
Press

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.

Press d to decrease the contrast or
press c to increase the contrast.
Press OK.

Note

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.

Press MP>T1, MP>T1>T2 1, T1>MP,
T1>T2>MP 1, Tray#1 Only,
Tray#2 Only 1 or MP Only.
T2 and Tray#2 Only appears only if the
optional lower tray is installed.

To change the default setting for Tray
Use, see Tray Use in copy mode in
Chapter 2 of the Basic User's Guide.

Press

a
b
c
d

(COPY).

Load your document.

Adjust the copy brightness to make copies
darker or lighter.

Press the option you want.

(COPY).

Load your document.
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Contrast.
Press Contrast.

Making copies

Sorting copies using the ADF
You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be
stacked in the order 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and so
on.

a
b
c
d

Press

e
f

Press Sort.

(COPY).

Load your document in the ADF.

Making N in 1 copies
(page layout)
You can reduce the amount of paper used
when copying by using the N in 1 copy
feature. This allows you to copy two or four
pages onto one page. If you want to copy
both sides of an ID card onto one page, see
2 in 1 ID Copy on page 57.

Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Stack/Sort.
Press Stack/Sort.

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.

Note
Sort is available only when the document
is in the ADF.

IMPORTANT
• Please make sure the paper size is set to
Letter, A4, Legal or Folio.
• You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce
setting with the N in 1 feature.
• (P) means Portrait and (L) means
Landscape.

a
b
c
d

Press

Press d or c to display Off(1in1),
2in1(P), 2in1(L), 2in1(ID) 1,
4in1(P) or 4in1(L).
Press the button you want.

Load your document.
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Page Layout.
Press Page Layout.

(COPY).

For details about 2in1(ID), see 2 in 1 ID
Copy on page 57.

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start to scan the page.
If you placed the document in the ADF,
the machine scans the pages and starts
printing.
If you are using the scanner glass, go
to step g.

After the machine scans the page, press
Yes to scan the next page.

Chapter 7

If you are copying from the scanner
glass:

Place the next page on the scanner
glass.
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Repeat steps g and h for each page of
the layout.

Insert your document face down in the
direction shown below:
 2 in 1 (P)

After all the pages have been scanned,
press No in step g to finish.

If you are copying from the ADF:

 2 in 1 (L)

Insert your document face up in the direction
shown below:
 2 in 1 (P)
 4 in 1 (P)
 2 in 1 (L)
 4 in 1 (L)

 4 in 1 (P)

 4 in 1 (L)

Making copies

2 in 1 ID Copy
You can copy both sides of your identification
card onto one page, keeping the original card
size.

Note
You can copy an identification card to the
extent permitted under applicable laws.
See Legal limitations for copying in the
Safety and Legal Booklet.

a
b

Press

Press Black Start or Color Start. The
machine scans the other side of the card
and prints the page.

Note
When 2 in 1 ID Copy is chosen, the
machine sets the quality to Photo and the
contrast to +2.

(COPY).

Place your identification card face down
on the left side of the scanner glass.

 Even if a document is placed on the
ADF, the machine scans the data
from the scanner glass.

c
d

Enter the number of copies you want.

Press d or c to display 2in1(ID).
Press 2in1(ID).

Press Black Start or Color Start.
After the machine scans the first side of
the card, the LCD will display
Turn over the ID Card
Then Press Start.

Turn over your identification card and
place it on the left side of the scanner
glass.

Press d or c to display Page Layout.
Press Page Layout.

Chapter 7

Adjusting Color (Saturation)

You can change the default setting for color
saturation.

a
b
c
d

Press

e
f

Press Red, Green or Blue.

(COPY).

Load your document.
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Color Adjust.
Press Color Adjust.

Press d to decrease or c to increase the
color saturation.
Press OK.

Repeat steps e and f if you want to
adjust the next color. Press
.

If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.

Setting your changes as the
new default

You can save the copy settings for Quality,
Brightness, Contrast and
Color Adjust you use most often by
setting them as the default. These settings
will stay until you change them again.

a
b

Press

After changing the last setting, press
d or c to display Set New Default.
Press Set New Default.

d
e

Press Yes.

(COPY).

Press d or c to choose the setting you
want to change, and then press the new
option.
Repeat this step for each setting you
want to change.

Press Stop/Exit.

Restoring all copy settings to
the factory settings

You can restore all the copy settings you
have changed to the factory settings. These
settings will stay until you change them again.

a
b

Press

c
d

Press Yes.

(COPY).

After changing the last setting, press
d or c to display Factory Reset.
Press Factory Reset.

Press Stop/Exit.

Making copies

Setting your favorites

Press

Press d or c to display
Favorite Settings.
Press Favorite Settings.

d
e
f

After you stored your favorite setting, you can
rename it.

You can store the copy settings that you use
most often by setting them as a favorite. You
can set up to three favorites.

a
b

Rename your favorite setting

(COPY).

Choose the copy option and settings
you want to store.

Press Store.
Press the location where you want to
store your setting for Favorite:1,
Favorite:2 or Favorite:3.
Do one of the following:

a
b

Press

c
d

Press Rename.

Enter the new name (up to 12
characters).

f
g

Press OK.

(COPY).

Press d or c to display
Favorite Settings.
Press Favorite Settings.

Press the favorite setting you want to
rename.

Press Stop/Exit.

 If you want to rename your setting,
press
to delete characters. Then
enter the new name (up to 12
characters). Press OK.
 If you do not want to rename your
setting, press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Retrieving your favorite setting

When you are ready to use one of your
favorite set of settings, you can recall it.

a
b
c

Press

Press Black Start or Color Start.

(COPY).

Press Favorite.
Press the favorite setting you want to
retrieve.

Routine maintenance

Cleaning and checking
the machine
Clean the outside and inside of the machine
regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you
replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit,
make sure that you clean the inside of the
machine. If printed pages are stained with
toner, clean the inside of the machine with a
dry, lint-free cloth.

WARNING
DO NOT use cleaning materials that
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of
spray, or any type of flammable substance
to clean the outside or inside of the
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
See To use the product safely in the Safety
and Legal Booklet for how to clean the
machine.

Be careful not to inhale toner.

IMPORTANT
Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with
volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine
will damage the surface of the machine.

Cleaning the outside of the
machine
A

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.

Routine maintenance

Wipe the outside of the machine with a
dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.

Cleaning the scanner

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Unfold the ADF document support (1)
and then open the ADF cover (2).
Clean the white bar (3) and the scanner
glass strip (4) underneath it with a soft
lint-free cloth moistened with water.
Close the ADF cover (2) and fold the
ADF document support (1).
3

Remove any paper that is in the paper
tray.

Wipe the inside and the outside of the
paper tray with a dry, lint-free soft cloth
to remove dust.

Lift the document cover (1).
Clean the white plastic surface (2) and
scanner glass (3) underneath it with a
soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
1
2

Re-load the paper and put the paper tray
firmly back in the machine.

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, connect all
cables, and then plug in the telephone
line cord. Turn on the machine’s power
switch.

In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1)
and the glass strip (2) underneath it with
a soft lint-free cloth moistened with
water.

Cleaning the laser scanner
windows

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

1
2

Note
In addition to cleaning the scanner glass
and glass strip with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water, run your finger tip
over the glass to see if you can feel
anything on it. If you feel dirt or debris,
clean the glass again concentrating on
that area. You may need to repeat the
cleaning process three or four times. To
test, make a copy after each cleaning.

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, connect all
cables, and then plug in the telephone
line cord. Turn on the machine’s power
switch.

Routine maintenance

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

IMPORTANT

Wipe the four scanner windows (1) with
a dry, lint-free cloth.

• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean,
flat surface with a sheet of disposable
paper or cloth underneath it in case you
accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit
when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides
of the drum unit.

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in
the release position as shown in the
illustration.

Routine maintenance

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum
unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of
the machine, then gently slide the drum
unit into the machine until it stops at the
green lock lever.

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

1
2

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise
to the lock position.

j
k

Close the front cover of the machine.
Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, connect all
cables, and then plug in the telephone
line cord. Turn on the machine’s power
switch.

Cleaning the corona wires
If you have print quality problems, clean the
four corona wires as follows:

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

Routine maintenance

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge
and slightly push it toward the machine
to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum
unit. Repeat this for all the toner
cartridges.

Push to release the latches of the
corona wire cover (1), and then open the
cover.

Clean the corona wires inside the drum
unit by gently sliding the green tabs from
left to right and right to left several times.

Note
• Be sure to return the tab to the home
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed
pages may have a vertical stripe.
• We recommend that you clean the corona
wire for each color. If you want to clean
only the corona wire of the color that
caused the print quality problem, see the
illustration below to identify the position of
each of the corona wires.

C
c

m
Y
y
K
k

C: Corona wire for Cyan
M: Corona wire for Magenta
Y: Corona wire for Yellow
K: Corona wire for Black
c: Cyan toner position label
m: Magenta toner position label
y: Yellow toner position label
k: Black toner position label

Routine maintenance

Close the corona wire cover.

A
C

Repeat steps d to f to clean each of
three remaining corona wires.

M
Y
K

C - Cyan

M - Magenta

Y - Yellow

K - Black

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Cleaning the drum unit
If your printout has colored dots or other
repeating marks at 3.7 in. (94 mm) intervals,
the drum may have foreign material, such as
glue from a label stuck on the drum surface.
Follow the steps below to solve the problem.

Close the front cover of the machine.

Make sure that the machine is in the
Ready mode.

b
c

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Drum Dot Print.
Press Drum Dot Print.

The machine will display Press Start.
Press Black Start or Color Start.

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Press a or b to display
Print Reports.
Press Print Reports.

Routine maintenance

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit
when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides
of the drum unit.

Routine maintenance

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge
and slightly push it to unlock it. Then pull
it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all
the toner cartridges.

• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the toner
cartridges on a clean, flat surface with a
sheet of disposable paper or cloth
underneath it in case you accidentally spill
or scatter toner.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
immediately wipe or wash it off with cold
water.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

Turn the drum unit over by holding the
green handles. Make sure that the drum
unit gears (1) are on the left hand side.

Read following information from the
drum dot check sheet.
 Dot color:
The color of printed dots is the color
of the drum you should clean.
 Dot location:
The sheet has eight numbered
columns. The number of the column
with the printed dots in it is used to
find the dot position on the drum.

Confirm suspected area of the
appropriate color drum by using the
numbers beside the drum which relate
to the column numbers.

Routine maintenance

Turn the drum unit gear toward you by
hand while looking at the surface of the
suspected area.

When you have found the mark on the
drum that matches the drum dot check
sheet, wipe the surface of the drum
gently with a cotton swab until the mark
on the surface comes off.

IMPORTANT
• The drum is photosensitive so DO NOT
touch it with your fingers.
• DO NOT clean the surface of the
photosensitive drum with a sharp object or
any liquids.
• DO NOT use a scrubbing or wiping motion
because this might damage the drum.

Turn the drum unit over by holding the
green handles.

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in
the release position as shown in the
illustration.

M
Y
K

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum
unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of
the machine, then gently slide the drum
unit into the machine until it stops at the
green lock lever.

1
2

C - Cyan

M - Magenta

Y - Yellow

K - Black

Routine maintenance

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise
to the lock position.

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, connect all
cables, and then plug in the telephone
line cord. Turn on the machine’s power
switch.

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Close the front cover of the machine.

Cleaning the paper pick-up
rollers

c
A

If you have paper feed problems, clean the
pick-up rollers as follows:

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the power cord from the AC
power outlet.

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.

Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked
in lukewarm water, and then wipe the
separator pad (1) of the paper tray with
it to remove dust.

Wipe the two pick-up rollers (1) inside of
the machine to remove dust.
1

e
f

Put the paper tray back in the machine.
Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet. Turn on the
machine’s power switch.

Routine maintenance

Calibration
The output density for each color may vary
depending on the environment the machine is
in, such as temperature and humidity.
Calibration helps you to improve the color
density.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.

Press a or b to display Calibration.
Press Calibration.

d
e

Press Calibrate.

f
g

The machine will display Completed.

The machine will display Calibrate?.
Press Yes to confirm.

Press Stop/Exit.

You can reset the calibration parameters
back to those set at the factory.

a
b

Note
• If an error message is displayed, press
Black Start or Color Start and try again.
(For more information, see Error and
maintenance messages in Appendix B of
the Basic User's Guide.)
• If you print using the Windows® printer
driver, the driver will get the calibration
data automatically if both Use Calibration
Data and Get Device Data
Automatically are on. (The default
settings are on. See Advanced tab in the
Software User's Guide.)
• If you print using the Macintosh printer
driver, you need to perform the calibration
using the Status Monitor. After turning
the Status Monitor on, choose Color
Calibration from the Control menu. (See
Status Monitor in the Software User's
Guide. When the Status Monitor is open,
choose Control / Color Calibration from
the menu bar.)

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.

Press a or b to display Calibration.
Press Calibration.

d
e

Press Reset.

f
g

The machine will display Completed.

The machine will display Reset?.
Press Yes to confirm.

Press Stop/Exit.

Auto Registration
Registration

If solid areas of color or images have cyan,
magenta or yellow fringes, you can use the
auto-registration feature to correct the
problem.

a
b

Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.
Press a or b to display Auto Regist..
Press Auto Regist..

The machine will display
Registration?.
Press Yes.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press a or b to display
Manual Regist..
Press Manual Regist..

d
e
f

Press Print Chart.

Starting at 1 Magenta Left on the chart,
check which colored bar has the most
uniform print density. Press
1 Magenta Left and choose the
number on the Touchscreen, using
d or c to display more numbers if
necessary.
Repeat for 2 Cyan Left,
3 Yellow Left,
4 Magenta Center,
5 Cyan Center, 6 Yellow Center,
7 Magenta Right, 8 Cyan Right,
and 9 Yellow Right, using a or b to
display all the options to set.

Press OK if you finished entering the
numbers.

Press Stop/Exit.

The machine will display Completed.
Press Stop/Exit.

If color still appears incorrectly after autoregistration, you will need to perform manual
registration.

Press MENU.

e
f

Manual Registration

Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.

Press Mono Start or Color Start.
When the machine has finished printing
the registration chart, press
Set Regist. to correct the color
manually.

Routine maintenance

Frequency (Color Correction)
You can set how often the color correction
(Color Calibration and Auto Registration)
occurs. The default setting is Normal. The
color correction process consumes some
amount of the toner.

a
b

Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.

Press a or b to display Frequency.
Press Frequency.

d
e

Press Normal, Low or Off.

Checking the Page Counters

You can see the machine’s Page Counters
for copies, printed pages, reports and lists,
faxes or a summary total.

a
b

Press MENU.

Press Page Counter.
The LCD shows number of pages for
Total, Fax/List, Copy or Print.

Press Total, Fax/List, Copy or
Print to see the page counters for
Color and Black & White.

Do one of the following:

Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to display
Machine Info..
Press Machine Info..

 To see the other options, press

 To exit, press Stop/Exit.

Checking the remaining life of
parts
You can see the machine’s parts life on the
LCD.

a
b

Press MENU.

c
d

Press Parts Life.

Press a or b to display
Machine Info..
Press Machine Info..

Press a or b to see the approximate
remaining parts life of the Drum,
Belt Unit, Fuser, Laser,
PF Kit MP, PF Kit 1 and
PF Kit 2.
Press Stop/Exit.

Note
The life check will be accurate only if you
have reset the part counter when you
installed a new part. It will not be accurate
if that part’s life counter was reset during
the life of the used part.

Replacing periodic
maintenance parts
The periodic maintenance parts will need to
be replaced regularly to maintain the print
quality. The parts listed below will have to be
replaced after printing approximately 50,000
pages 1 for PF Kit MP and 100,000 pages 1
for PF Kit 1, PF Kit 2, Fuser and Laser.
Please call Brother Customer Service when
the following messages appear on the LCD.
1

Letter or A4 size single-sided pages.

LCD message

Description

Replace Parts
Fuser Unit

Replace the fuser unit.

Replace Parts
Laser Unit

Replace the laser unit.

Replace Parts
PF Kit 1

Replace the paper feeding
kit for the paper tray.

Replace Parts
PF Kit 2

Replace the paper feeding
kit for the lower tray
(option).

Replace Parts
PF Kit MP

Replace the paper feeding
kit for the multi-purpose
tray.

Routine maintenance

Packing and shipping
the machine

Note
• If for any reason you must ship your
machine, carefully repack the machine in
the original packaging to avoid any
damage during transit. The machine
should be adequately insured with the
carrier.

WARNING
This machine is heavy and weighs
approximately 62.8 lb (28.5 kg). To prevent
possible injuries at least two people should
lift the machine. Be careful not to pinch your
fingers when you put the machine down.

• If you are returning your machine to
Brother as part of the Exchange Service,
pack only the machine. Keep all separate
parts, including the drum unit, the toner
cartridges, and printed materials to use
with your ‘Exchange’ machine.
Make sure that you have the following parts
for repacking:
1
3
2

If you use a Lower Tray, carry it separately
from your machine.

IMPORTANT
When shipping the machine, the waste
toner box must be removed from the
machine and put in a plastic bag, and then
sealed. Failure to remove it and put it in a
plastic bag before shipping may cause
severe damage to the machine and may
void the warranty.

Plastic bag for the waste toner box

Orange packing materials for locking the
internal parts (4 pieces)

A piece of paper (Letter or A4) to protect the
belt unit (Please supply this yourself)

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Press the front cover release button and
then open the front cover.

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

Routine maintenance

IMPORTANT
• Hold the green handles of the drum unit
when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides
of the drum unit.
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit on a clean, flat surface with a piece of
disposable paper underneath it in case
you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• Handle the toner cartridge and the waste
toner box carefully. If toner scatters on
your hands or clothes, immediately wipe
or wash it off with cold water.
• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

Hold the green handle of the belt unit
with both hands and lift the belt unit up,
then pull it out.

Remove the two pieces of orange
packing material and discard them.

Note
This step is only necessary when you are
replacing the waste toner box for the first
time, and is not required for the
replacement waste toner box. The orange
packing pieces are installed at the factory
to protect your machine during shipment
from the factory.

Routine maintenance

Remove the waste toner box from the
machine using the green handle, and
then put it in a plastic bag and seal the
bag completely.

Put the belt unit back into the machine.
Make sure the belt unit is level and fits
firmly into place.

IMPORTANT

Handle the waste toner box carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
immediately wipe or wash it off with cold
water.

Install orange packing materials to the
drum unit as follows:
 To secure the toner cartridges, install
the matching orange packing strips
(1) (marked L and R) to the drum unit
on the left and right sides, as shown
in the illustration.
 Attach the orange packing strip (2) to
the left side of the drum unit, as
shown in the illustration.
 Slide the small orange packing
material (3) onto the metal shaft on
the right side of the drum unit, as
shown in the illustration.

1L
1R

Routine maintenance

Put a piece of paper (Letter or A4) on the
belt unit to prevent damage to the belt
unit.

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum
unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of
the machine, then gently slide the drum
unit into the machine until it stops at the
green lock lever.

1
2

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in
the release position as shown in the
illustration.

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise
to the lock position.

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Put the Styrofoam piece (2) into the
lower carton (1). Then put the waste
toner box in the Styrofoam piece.

FRONT

Wrap the machine with a plastic bag.
Put the machine on the Styrofoam piece
(1).

Close the front cover of the machine.

1
FRONT

Routine maintenance

Put the Styrofoam piece (2) into the
back side of Styrofoam piece (1) as
shown in the illustration.

Place the upper carton (1) over the
machine and the lower carton (2). Align
the joint holes of the upper carton with
the joint holes of the lower carton.
Secure the upper carton to the lower
carton using the four plastic joints (3) as
shown in the illustration.
1

3
1

2
3

Put the two Styrofoam pieces (1) into the
carton matching the right of the machine
to the "RIGHT" mark on one of the
Styrofoam pieces, and the left of the
machine to the "LEFT" mark on the
other Styrofoam piece. Put the AC
power cord and printed materials in the
original carton as shown in the
illustration.

LEFT

RIGHT

1
1

Note
If you are returning your machine to
Brother as part of the Exchange Service,
pack only the machine. Keep all separate
parts, including the drum unit, toner
cartridges, and printed materials to use
with your ‘Exchange’ machine.

Close the carton and tape it shut.

Options

This machine has the following optional accessories. You can increase the capabilities of the
machine with these items.
Lower tray unit

SO-DIMM memory

LT-300CL

Optional paper tray
(LT-300CL)
An optional lower tray can be installed, and it
can hold up to 500 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2)
paper.
When an optional tray is installed, the
machine can hold up to 800 sheets of plain
paper.

Memory board
B

MFC-9970CDW has 256 MB of standard
memory. The machine has one slot for
optional memory expansion. You can
increase the memory up to maximum of
512 MB by installing one SO-DIMM (Small
Outline Dual In-line Memory Module).

SO-DIMM Types

You can install the following SO-DIMMs:
 128 MB Kingston KTH-LJ2015/128
 256 MB Kingston KTH-LJ2015/256
 128 MB Transcend TS128MHP422A
 256 MB Transcend TS256MHP423A
For setup, see the Instructions that we have
supplied with the lower tray unit.

Note
• For more information, visit the Kingston
Technology Web site at
http://www.kingston.com/.
• For more information, visit the Transcend
Web site at http://www.transcend.com.tw/.
In general, the SO-DIMM must have the
following specifications:
Type: 144-pin and 16-bit output
CAS latency: 4
Clock frequency: 267 MHz (533 Mb/S/Pin) or
more
Capacity: 64, 128 or 256 MB
Height: 30.0 mm (1.18 in.)
DRAM type: DDR2 SDRAM

Note
• There might be some SO-DIMMs that will
not work with the machine.
• For more information, call the dealer you
bought the machine from or Brother
Customer Service.

Options

Installing extra memory

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord.

Disconnect the interface cable from the
machine, and then unplug the power
cord from the AC power outlet.

Hold the SO-DIMM by the edges and
align the notches in the SO-DIMM with
the protrusions in the slot. Insert the
SO-DIMM diagonally (1), then tilt it
toward the interface board until it clicks
into place (2).
1

Note
Be sure to turn off the machine’s power
switch before you install or remove the
SO-DIMM.

c
2

Remove the plastic (1) and then
metal (2) SO-DIMM covers.
1

Put the metal (2) and then the plastic (1)
SO-DIMM covers back on.
1

Unpack the SO-DIMM and hold it by its
edges.
2

IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
memory chips or the board surface.

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and then
connect the interface cable.

Plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on
the machine’s power switch.

Note
To make sure that you have installed the
SO-DIMM properly, you can print the user
settings page that shows the current
memory size. (See How to print a report
on page 50.)

Glossary

This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of
these features depends on the model you purchased.
ADF (automatic document feeder)
The document can be placed in the ADF
and scanned one page at a time
automatically.
Auto Reduction
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.
Automatic fax transmission
Sending a fax without picking up the
handset of the external telephone or
pressing Hook.
Automatic Redial
A feature that enables your machine to
redial the last fax number after five
minutes if the fax did not go through
because the line was busy.
Backup Print
Your machine prints a copy of every fax
that is received and stored in memory.
This is a safety feature so you will not lose
messages during a power failure.
Batch Transmission
As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes
to the same fax number will be sent as one
transmission.
Beeper Volume
Volume setting for the beep when you
press a key or make an error.
Broadcasting
The ability to send the same fax message
to more than one location.
Cancel Job
Cancels a programmed print job and
clears the machine’s memory.
CNG tones
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax
machines during automatic transmission
to tell the receiving machine that a fax
machine is calling.

Coding method
Method of coding the information
contained in the document. All fax
machines must use a minimum standard
of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine
is capable of greater compression
methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified
Modified Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the
receiving machine has the same
capability.
Communication error (or Comm. Error)
An error during fax sending or receiving,
usually caused by line noise or static.
Compatibility group
The ability of one fax unit to communicate
with another. Compatibility is assured
between ITU-T Groups.
Contrast
Setting to compensate for dark or light
documents, by making faxes or copies of
dark documents lighter and light
documents darker.
Delayed Fax
Sends your fax at a specified later time
that day.
Distinctive Ring
A subscriber service purchased from the
telephone company that gives you
another telephone number on an existing
telephone line. The Brother machine uses
the new number to simulate a dedicated
fax line.
Dual Access
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or
scheduled jobs into memory at the same
time it is sending a fax or receiving or
printing an incoming fax.

Easy Receive
Enables your machine to respond to CNG
tones if you interrupt a fax call by
answering it.
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
Detects errors during fax transmission
and resends the pages of the fax that had
an error.
Extension telephone
A telephone on the fax number that is
plugged into a separate telephone wall
jack.
External telephone
A telephone that is plugged into the EXT
jack of your machine.
F/T Ring Time
The length of time that the Brother
machine pseudo/double-rings (when the
Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify
you to pick up a voice call that it answered.
Fax Forwarding
Sends a fax received into the memory to
another pre-programmed fax number.
Fax Journal
Lists information about the last
200 incoming and outgoing faxes. TX
means Transmit. RX means Receive.
Fax Receive Code
Press this code (l51) when you answer a
fax call on an extension or external
telephone.
Fax Storage
You can store faxes in the memory.
Fax tones
The signals sent by sending and receiving
fax machines while communicating
information.
Fax/Tel
You can receive faxes and telephone
calls. Do not use this mode if you are
using a telephone answering device
(TAD).

Fine resolution
Resolution is 203 × 196 dpi. It is used for
small print and graphs.
Gray Scale
The shades of gray available for copying
and faxing photographs.
Group number
A combination of One Touch and
Speed Dial numbers that are stored on an
One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location
for Broadcasting.
Help List
A printout of the complete Menu table that
you can use to program your machine
when you do not have the User’s Guides
with you.
Journal Period
The pre-programmed time period
between automatically printed Fax
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax
Journal on demand without interrupting
the cycle.
LCD (liquid crystal display)
The display screen on the machine that
shows interactive messages during
On-Screen Programming and shows the
date and time when the machine is idle.
Manual fax
When you lift the handset of your external
telephone or press Hook so you can hear
the receiving fax machine answer before
you press Black Start or Color Start to
begin transmission.
Menu mode
Programming mode for changing your
machine’s settings.
OCR (optical character recognition)
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR
or Presto! PageManager software
application converts an image of text to
text you can edit.

Glossary

One Touch
Keys on the machine’s control panel
where you can store numbers for easy
dialing. You can store a second number
on each key if you press 21-40 and the
One Touch key together.
Out of Paper Reception
Receives faxes into the machine’s
memory when the machine is out of paper.
Overseas Mode
Makes temporary changes to the fax
tones to accommodate noise and static on
overseas telephone lines.
Paging
This feature enables your machine to call
your pager when a fax is received into its
memory.
Pause
Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in
the dialing sequence while you are dialing
using the dial pad or while you are storing
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
Press Redial/Pause as many times as
needed for longer pauses.

Remote Retrieval Access
The ability to access your machine
remotely from a touch tone telephone.
Resolution
The number of vertical and horizontal lines
per inch.
Ring Delay
The number of rings before the machine
answers in Fax Only and Fax/Tel
modes.
Ring Volume
Volume setting for the machine’s ring.
Scanning
The process of sending an electronic
image of a paper document into your
computer.
Search
An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored
One Touch, Speed Dial, Group numbers
and LDAP.
Speed Dial
A pre-programmed number for easy
dialing.

Polling
The process of a fax machine calling
another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax
messages.

Station ID
The stored information that appears on
the top of faxed pages. It includes the
sender’s name and fax number.

Pulse (Canada only)
A form of rotary dialing on a telephone
line.

TAD (telephone answering device)
You can connect an external device or
answering machine to the EXT. jack of
your machine.

Real Time Transmission
When memory is full, you can send faxes
in real time.
Remaining Jobs
You can check which programmed fax
jobs are waiting in the memory and cancel
the jobs individually.
Remote Access Code
Your own four-digit code (– – –l) that
allows you to call and access your
machine from a remote location.

Telephone Answer Code
(Fax/Tel mode only)
When the machine answers a voice call, it
pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at
an extension telephone by pressing this
code (#51).
Tel Index List
A listing of names and numbers stored in
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in
numerical order.

Temporary settings
You can choose certain options for each
fax transmission and copy without
changing the default settings.
Tone
A form of dialing on the telephone line
used for Touch Tone telephones.
Transmission
The process of sending faxes over the
telephone lines from your machine to the
receiving fax machine.
Transmission Verification Report
A report for each transmission, that shows
its date, time and number.
User Settings List
A printed report that shows the current
settings of the machine.

100

Index

Apple Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide.

Daylight Savings Time ............................... 3
Deep Sleep mode ...................................... 4
Delayed batch transmission .................... 23
Dialing
access codes and credit card
numbers ............................................... 43
dial prefix ................................................ 5
groups (broadcasting) .......................... 20
restricting dialing .................................. 15
Drum unit
checking (remaining life) ...................... 82
cleaning .......................................... 66, 70
Dual access ............................................. 20
Duplex copy ............................................. 53

B
Broadcasting ............................................20
canceling ...............................................21
setting up groups for .............................44

C
Canceling
broadcast in process .............................21
fax jobs in memory ................................23
fax storage ............................................30
jobs awaiting redial ...............................23
remote fax options ................................32
Cleaning
corona wires .........................................66
drum unit ...............................................70
laser scanner windows .........................62
scanner .................................................61
Connecting
two-line external TAD or telephone ......42
ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)
See Software User’s Guide.
ControlCenter4 (for Windows®)
See Software User’s Guide.
Copy
2 in 1 ID Copy .......................................57
brightness .............................................54
contrast .................................................54
enlarge/reduce ......................................52
key ........................................................51
N in 1 (page layout) ..............................55
quality ...................................................51
sort (ADF only) ......................................55
temporary settings ................................51
using ADF ...................................... 55, 56
using scanner glass ....................... 55, 56
Cover page ..............................................25
custom comments .................................25
for all faxes ...........................................26
printed form ...........................................26

E
Enlarge/Reduce ....................................... 52

F
Fax codes
changing ............................................... 33
remote access code ............................. 33
Fax forwarding
changing remotely .......................... 34, 35
programming a number ........................ 28
Fax storage ............................................. 30
printing from memory ........................... 38
turning off ............................................. 32
turning on ............................................. 30
Fax, stand-alone
receiving
at end of conversation ....................... 37
fax forwarding .............................. 28, 35
fax receive stamp .............................. 37
into memory (fax storage) ................. 30
paging ............................................... 29
polling receive ................................... 39
reducing to fit on paper ..................... 36
retrieving from a remote site ....... 34, 35
to your PC ......................................... 31

101

sending .................................................17
at end of conversation ........................19
broadcasting ......................................20
canceling from memory ......................23
contrast ..............................................18
delayed batch .....................................23
delayed fax .........................................22
from memory (dual access) ...............20
manual ...............................................19
overseas ............................................22
polled transmit ....................................27
real time transmission ........................22
resolution ...........................................18
Fax/Tel mode
receiving faxes ......................................41

N in 1 (page layout) ................................. 55
Network
faxing
See Software User’s Guide.
printing
See Network User’s Guide.
scanning
See Software User’s Guide.

Groups for broadcasting ..........................44

Page layout (N in 1) ................................. 55
Paging ..................................................... 29
programming your cell number ............. 29
programming your pager number ......... 29
PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR
See Software User’s Guide and Help in the
PaperPort™ 12SE application to access
How-to-Guides.
PC-Fax
See Software User’s Guide.
Polling
polled transmit ...................................... 27
polling receive ...................................... 39
Power failure ............................................. 1
Presto! PageManager
See Software User’s Guide. See also Help
in the Presto! PageManager application.
Print
fax from memory .................................. 38
reports .................................................. 50
Printing
See Software User’s Guide.

H
HELP ........................................................50
Help List ................................................50
Hook key ..................................................41

J
Jacks
convert to RJ11 jack
triplex adapter ....................................41

L
LCD (liquid crystal display)
backlight brightness ................................5
Help List ................................................50

M
Machine information
checking remaining life of parts ............82
page counts ..........................................81
Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide.
Maintenance, routine ...............................60
checking the remaining life of parts ......82
Manual
transmission ..........................................19

102

Memory
adding DIMM (option) ........................... 94
installing ............................................ 95
storage ................................................... 1

Q
Quality
copying .................................................51
Quick dial
access codes and credit card
numbers ................................................43
broadcasting .........................................20
using groups ......................................20
group dial
setting up groups for broadcasting ....44

R
Redial/Pause key .............................. 43, 99
Reducing
copies ...................................................52
incoming faxes ......................................36
Remote retrieval .......................................33
access code ..........................................33
commands ............................................35
getting your faxes .................................34
Remote setup
See Software User’s Guide.
Reports ............................................. 49, 50
Fax Journal .................................... 49, 50
journal period .....................................49
Help List ................................................50
how to print ...........................................50
Network Configuration ..........................50
Tel Index List ........................................50
Transmission Verification ......................49
User Settings ........................................50
Resolution
fax (standard, fine, superfine, photo) ....18
setting for next fax ................................18
Restricted users .........................................9

Sleep mode ............................................... 4
Sort .......................................................... 55

T
TAD (telephone answering device),
external .................................................... 42
with two-line jack .................................. 42
Telephone line
converting wall outlets .......................... 41
roll over lines ........................................ 41
two-line telephone system .................... 41
Temporary copy settings ......................... 51
Timer for mode keys .................................. 6
Toner Save ................................................ 3
Two-line telephone system ...................... 41

V
Volume, setting
beeper .................................................... 2
ring ......................................................... 1
speaker .................................................. 2

W
Windows®
See Software User’s Guide.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User’s Guide.

S
Scanning
See Software User’s Guide.
Security
restricting dialing ...................................15
Secure function lock
administrator password ........................8
Public user mode ................................. 9
restricted users ....................................9
Setting lock ...........................................13

103

Visit us on the World Wide Web
http://www.brother.com/

This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their
dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2010:04:14 10:33:09+09:00
Creator                         : Adobe Acrobat Pro 9.3.1
Modify Date                     : 2014:12:07 12:08:43+08:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2014:12:07 12:08:43+08:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe Acrobat Pro 9.3.1
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:1c91f79c-94a3-4976-9b16-2cf967eb1a6c
Instance ID                     : uuid:96d6251a-62bf-6245-bad3-ae65a763ebda
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat Pro 9.3.1
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 341

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Brother Mfc 9 970Cdw Users Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation